Panasonic of North America CA-170-CTPLHS CA-170-CTPL-HS radio with BT, Navigation and Integrated Display User Manual Can be modified by macros

Panasonic Corporation of North America CA-170-CTPL-HS radio with BT, Navigation and Integrated Display Can be modified by macros

Users manual

INTRODUCTION/WELCOMEWELCOME FROM FCA US LLC .......3CONTROLS AT A GLANCEDRIVERCOCKPIT ...............6INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...........8GETTING STARTEDVEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY).........................10KEYFOB ...................11REMOTESTART ...............14TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .......15KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVEENTRY .....................16KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION . . . 18VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ........19OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....20HEAD RESTRAINTS .............49SEATING ....................51HEATED STEERING WHEEL ........60TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN.........................61OPERATING YOUR VEHICLEENGINE BREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS ............63TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAMLEVER .....................67HEADLIGHT SWITCH ............68ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ......69ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ....72LANESENSE .................78PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA . . . 79PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST .....80BLIND SPOT MONITORING .........80EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION ...............82AUTOSTICK/STEERING WHEEL MOUNTEDPADDLE SHIFTERS ..............84SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCECONTROL ...................86MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLS .......87AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC).........................89POWER SUNROOF ..............91WIND BUFFETING ..............92ELECTRONICSYOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM ....94CYBERSECURITY ...............95IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIO .........96SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ............98UCONNECT 5.0 ...............107UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICKTIPS .....................111UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAV ..........117UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICKTIPS .....................136UCONNECT PHONE ............148STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . 156INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ....156PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES .......161UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER . . 162POWEROUTLET ..............164UTILITYTRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUMTRAILERWEIGHTRATINGS) .......167RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHINDMOTORHOME,ETC.) ............168SRTDRIVE MODES ................169SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURES .....170SUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES ....174WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESROADSIDE ASSISTANCE ..........175WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . 175IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS ......182JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .....183TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . 189BATTERY LOCATION ............195JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES .....195MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEEDTRANSMISSION ..............198TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .....199FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .......200ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM(EARS) ....................201EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .....201MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEOPENING THE HOOD ...........202ENGINECOMPARTMENT—3.6L ....204ENGINECOMPARTMENT—5.7L ....206ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2LSUPERCHARGED ..............208ENGINECOMPARTMENT—6.4L ....210FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT .....212FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT ........212FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS—NON-SRT .................213SRT FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINEPARTS ....................215MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ......216MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE —NON-SRT ...................216MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — SRT . . . 224FUSES ....................231TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .......236TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . 242DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....245FUEL DOOR RELEASE ..........246TABLE OF CONTENTSDraft Manual
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IFEQUIPPED .................248REPLACEMENT BULBS ..........248CONSUMER ASSISTANCEFCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER ....250FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER........................250ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIRED........................250PUBLICATIONS ORDERING ........250REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THEUNITEDSTATES ..............251MOPAR® ACCESSORIESAUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR . 252FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONSFAQ’s .....................253INDEX......................0TABLE OF CONTENTS2
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLCCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC (“FCA US”) vehicle. Be assured thatit represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.Your new FCA US vehicle has characteristics to enhance the driver's control under somedriving conditions. These are to assist the driver and are never a substitute for attentivedriving. They can never take the driver's place. Always drive carefully.Your new vehicle has many features for the comfort and convenience of you and yourpassengers. Some of these should not be used when driving because they take your eyesfrom the road or your attention from driving. Never text while driving or take your eyes,more than momentarily, off the road.This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that areeither standard or optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include a description offeatures and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not availableon this vehicle. FCA US reserves the right to make changes in design and specificationsand/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligationupon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.This User Guide has been prepared to help you quickly become acquainted with theimportant features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will need to operate andmaintain the vehicle, including emergency information.The DVD includes a computer application containing detailed Owner's information whichcan be viewed on a personal computer or MAC computer. The multimedia DVD alsoincludes videos which can be played on any standard DVD player (including the UconnectTouchscreen Radios if equipped with DVD player capabilities). Additional DVD opera-tional information is located on the back of the DVD sleeve.For complete owner information, refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD in the owner’skit provided at the time of new vehicle purchase. For your convenience, the informationcontained on the DVD may also be printed and saved for future reference.FCA US is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By convertingfrom paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the user information for your vehicle,together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the stress onour environment.INTRODUCTION/WELCOME3
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to bedeleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution (excluding legal lines).WARNING!• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the riskof serious personal injury.• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicleis moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedalcausing a loss of vehicle control.• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interferencewith the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of thevehicle.• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned notto touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children.A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.• Never use the ‘PARK’ position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply theparking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possibleinjury or damage.• Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.USE OF AFTERMARKET PRODUCTS (ELECTRONICS)The use of aftermarket devices including cell phones, MP3 players, GPS systems, orchargers may affect the performance of on-board wireless features including KeylessEnter-N-Go and Remote Start range. If you are experiencing difficulties with any of yourwireless features, try disconnecting your aftermarket devices to see if the situationimproves. If your symptoms persist, please see an authorized dealer.When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best,has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®parts, and cares about yoursatisfaction.INTRODUCTION/WELCOME4
INTRODUCTION/WELCOME5
DRIVER COCKPIT1. Driver Memory Seat pg. 522. Headlight Switch pg. 683. Paddle Shifters pg. 844. Instrument Cluster pg. 85. Instrument Cluster Display pg. 1566. Engine Start/Stop Button pg. 187. Identify Your Radio pg. 968. Glove/Storage Compartment9. Switch Panel• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) pg. 178• Hazard Switch• Manual Audio ControlsCONTROLS AT A GLANCE6
10. Climate Controls pg. 8711. Power Outlet pg. 16412. Gear Selector pg. 8213. Speed Control pg. 6914. Instrument Cluster Display Controls pg. 16115. Emergency Brake Pedal16. Power Door Lock Switches17. Power Window Switches18. Power Mirrors SwitchCONTROLS AT A GLANCE7
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER1. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge2. Tachometer3. Instrument Cluster Display(See page 175 for Instrument Cluster Warning Lights information.)CONTROLS AT A GLANCE8
4. Gear Selector Position5. Speedometer6. Fuel Filler Location/Fuel Gauge(See page 0 for Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights information.)CONTROLS AT A GLANCE9
VEHICLE USER GUIDE (U.S. MARKET ONLY)Access your Owner’s Information – right through your Uconnect 8.4 or 8.4 NAV touch-screen radio — If Equipped (See page 96 for Identifying your radio).To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the UconnectApps button, then press the Vehicle User Guide icon on your touchscreen.NOTE:Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try toaccess while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature not available whilethe vehicle is in motion.Pre-Installed Features•Your User Guide — Updated in real-time •Available when and where you need it•Touchscreen convenience •Customizable interface•Maintenance schedules and information •Multilingual•Comprehensive icon & symbol glossaryOnce you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warrantyinformation and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect radio willdisplay the Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understandingyour vehicle. There’s no app to download, no phone to connect and no external deviceneeded for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it never goesout of date.Vehicle User Guide Home ScreenGETTING STARTED10
Features/Benefits• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio• Enhanced search and browsing capability• Robust NAV application — If Equipped• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites category• Icon and symbol glossary• Warranty information• Crucial driver information and assistance:•Operating Instructions •Maintenance Schedules•Warranty Information •Emergency Procedures•Fluid Level Standards •911 Contact and MoreTip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access inthe future.KEY FOBDescription Of Key FobThe key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob and an emergency key,which stores in the rear of the key fob.The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or thekey fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the storage compart-ment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the back of the key fobsideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.Base Key FobEnhanced Search And Browsing Capability Icon And Symbol GlossaryGETTING STARTED11
SRT 392 Key FobSRT Hellcat Key FobNOTE:SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Su-percharged engine come with three keyfobs (two red and one black) that allow fordifferent engine power levels. Please referto the "Drive Modes" in “SRT” section inthis guide for further descriptions.Base Key Fob1 — Trunk2 — Unlock3 — Lock4 — Remote Start5 — Panic Alarm6 — Emergency KeySRT 392 Key Fob1 — Trunk2 — Unlock3 — Lock4 — Remote Start5 — Panic Alarm6 — Emergency KeyGETTING STARTED12
Locking And Unlocking The DoorsPush and release the lock button on thekey fob to lock all doors. The turn signallights will flash, and the horn will chirp toacknowledge the signal.Push and release the unlock button onthe key fob once to unlock the driver's dooror twice within five seconds to unlock alldoors. The turn signal lights will flash toacknowledge the unlock signal. The illumi-nated entry system will also turn on.1st Press Of Key Fob UnlocksThis feature lets you program the system tounlock either the driver's door or all doors onthe first push of the unlock button on thekey fob. To change the current setting, referto your “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” in yourOwner's Manual on the DVD for furtherinformation.Opening The TrunkPush the Trunk Release button on the key fob two times within five seconds to open thetrunk.Panic Alarm1. Push the PANIC button once to turn the panic alarm on.2. Wait approximately three seconds and push the button a second time to turn the panicalarm off.Emergency KeyShould the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead, there is an emergency key locatedin the key fob that can be used for locking and unlocking the doors. To remove theemergency key, slide the button at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb andthen pull the key out with your other hand.SRT Hellcat Key Fob1 — Trunk2 — Unlock3 — Lock4 — Remote Start5 — Panic Alarm6 — Emergency KeyGETTING STARTED13
WARNING!• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF"mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.A child or others could be severely injured or killed. Children should be warned notto touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the transmission gear selector. Do notleave the key fob inside the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do notleave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUNmode. A child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, ormove the vehicle.• Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heatbuild-up may cause them to be severely injured or killed.• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.REMOTE STARTPush the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. Pushing theRemote Start button a third time shuts the engine off.To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and cycle the ignition to the ON/RUNposition.With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignitionis cycled to the ON/RUN position.The vehicle must be cycled to the ON/RUN position after two consecutive timeouts.Emergency KeyGETTING STARTED14
WARNING!• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gascontains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide ispoisonous and can cause you or others to be severely injured or killed when inhaled.• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows,door locks or other controls could cause you and others to be severely injured orkilled.TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASEThe trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pushing the trunk release buttonlocated on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.NOTE:The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate.• The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pushing the trunk button onthe key fob twice within five seconds.• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk Open symbol will display in theinstrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display will reappearonce the trunk is closed.• With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch, theTrunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.• Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To Know Before Starting” inyour Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information on trunk operation with thePassive Entry feature.Trunk Emergency ReleaseAs a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunklatching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the trunkcan be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunklatching mechanism.GETTING STARTED15
WARNING!Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk fromoutside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when yourvehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die fromsuffocation or heat stroke.KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRYIntroduction To Keyless Enter-N-GoThe Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s keyfob. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and trunk withouthaving to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons as well as starting and stopping thevehicle with the push of a button.To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger SideInternal Emergency Trunk ReleaseGETTING STARTED16
With a valid key fob located outside thevehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driveror passenger side door handle, lift eitherfront door handle to unlock the door auto-matically.To Lock The VehicleBoth front door handles have buttons lo-cated on the outside of the handle. Withone of the vehicle's key fobs located outsidethe vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of thedriver's or passenger front door handle,push the door handle button to lock all fourdoors and trunk.Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the lock button. This could unlock the door(s).NOTE:• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab holdof the front driver's door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in your vehicle'sOwner's Manual on the DVD or “Programmable Features” for further information.• If a key fob is detected in the vehicle when locking the vehicle using the power doorlock switch, the doors will unlock and the horn will chirp three times. On the thirdattempt, your key fob can be locked inside the vehicle.• After pushing the button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock thevehicle using the door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is lockedby pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.• If a Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours,the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature for that handle may time out. Pullingthe deactivated front door handle will reactivate the door handle's Keyless Enter-N-Go— Passive Entry feature.Lift The Door Handle To UnlockPush The Door Handle Passive Entry ButtonTo LockDo NOT Grab The Handle When LockingGETTING STARTED17
To Enter The TrunkWith a valid key fob located outside thevehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the trunk,push the button on the right side of appli-que which is located on the trunk.Whenever the vehicle is unlocked, you canenter the trunk by pushing the button on theright side of the applique.NOTE:Please refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Pas-sive Entry” in “Things To Know BeforeStarting” in your Owner's Manual on theDVD for further information.KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO —IGNITIONStarting1. Place the gear selector in PARK or NEU-TRAL.2. While pushing the brake pedal, push theENGINE START/STOP button once. Ifthe engine fails to start, the starter willdisengage automatically after 10 sec-onds.3. To stop the cranking of the engine priorto the engine starting, push the buttonagain.Stopping1. Place the gear selector in PARK.2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP buttononce. The ignition switch will return tothe OFF position.If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for twoseconds and vehicle speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.Trunk Passive Entry ButtonEngine START/STOP ButtonGETTING STARTED18
NOTE:If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and thetransmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes ofinactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position.Accessory Positions With Engine OffNOTE:The following functions are with the driver’s foot off of the Brake Pedal (transmission inPARK).Beginning With The Ignition Switch In The OFF Position:1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to cycle the ignition to the ACC position.2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to cycle the ignition to theON/RUN position.3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFFposition.NOTE:If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN(engine not running) position and the trans-mission is in PARK, the system will auto-matically time out after 30 minutes of inac-tivity, and the ignition is returned to the OFFposition.VEHICLE SECURITY ALARMThe vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and theignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed, interiorswitches for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, thevehicle security alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn willpulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in theinstrument cluster will flash.To ArmPush the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition button until the instrument cluster displayindicates that the vehicle ignition is “OFF.” Push the power door lock switch while the dooris open, push the key fob lock button, or with one of the key fobs located outside thevehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, push thepassive entry lock button located on the door handle.Ignition PositionsGETTING STARTED19
NOTE:After pushing the passive entry lock button, you must wait two seconds before you canlock or unlock the vehicle via the door handle.To DisarmPush the key fob unlock button or with one of the key fobs located outside the vehicle andwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver's and passenger front door handles, grab the KeylessEnter-N-Go door handle and enter the vehicle, then push the Keyless Enter-N-Go —Ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMSSome of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:Occupant Restraint Systems Features• Seat Belt Systems• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags• Child RestraintsSome of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorizeddealer.Important Safety PrecautionsPlease pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use yourrestraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rearseat.2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in thefront passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper childrestraint (refer to “Child Restraints”).3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to "ChildRestraints") should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints orbelt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rearseat.4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure thatyou are using it properly.6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.GETTING STARTED20
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allowthe front air bags room to inflate.8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, anddeployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space betweenoccupants and the door and occupants could be injured.9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabledperson, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You NeedConsumer Assistance” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.WARNING!• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.Seat Belt SystemsBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on theroad may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happenfar away from home or on your own street.Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness ofinjuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from thevehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused bystriking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. TheBelt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUNposition.Initial IndicationIf the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUNposition, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seatpassenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled whenthe ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Lightwill turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboardfront passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat isunoccupied.BeltAlert Warning SequenceGETTING STARTED21
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specifiedvehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seatBeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). TheBeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and soundingan intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat BeltReminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warningsequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard frontseat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckletheir seat belts.Change Of StatusIf the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passengerseat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlertwarning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard frontpassenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other itemsare placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (ifequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in petharnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does notrecommend deactivating BeltAlert.NOTE:If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (ifequipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat BeltReminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seatpassenger seat belts are buckled.Lap/Shoulder BeltsAll seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. Thisfeature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normalconditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of strikingthe inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.GETTING STARTED22
WARNING!• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are notproperly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers,or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicleare buckled up properly.• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seatsand seat belts.• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not anair bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injuryor death in the event of a crash.• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Followthese instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together cancrash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use alap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat beltforces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Alwayswear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut intoyou. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’tstraighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediatelyand have it fixed.• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lapportion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you couldmove too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the insidesurfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat beltworn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take theforce in a collision.• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision.You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with noprotection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or looseparts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modifythe seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.GETTING STARTED23
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in therear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out theseat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat beltto go around your lap.3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,insert the latch plate into the buckleuntil you hear a “click.”4. Position the lap belt so that it is snugand lies low across your hips, below yourabdomen. To remove slack in the lapbelt portion, pull up on the shoulderbelt. To loosen the lap belt if it is tootight, tilt the latch plate and pull on thelap belt. A snug seat belt reduces therisk of sliding under the seat belt in acollision.5. Position the shoulder belt across theshoulder and chest with minimal, if anyslack so that it is comfortable and notresting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automaticallyretract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing toallow the seat belt to retract fully.Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureUse the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seatbelt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latchplate.3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enterthe slot at the top of the latch plate.4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat beltis no longer twisted.Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageIn the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjustedupward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze theanchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position thatserves you best.Pulling Out The Latch Plate1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate2 — Seat Belt BuckleGETTING STARTED24
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,you will prefer the shoulder belt anchoragein a lower position, and if you are taller thanaverage, you will prefer the shoulder beltanchorage in a higher position. After yourelease the anchorage button, try to move itup or down to make sure that it is locked inposition.NOTE:The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-age is equipped with an Easy Up feature.This feature allows the shoulder belt an-chorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the releasebutton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulderbelt anchorage until it is locked into position.WARNING!• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Followthese instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack sothat it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw anyslack in the shoulder belt.• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.Seat Belt ExtenderIf a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extendedand the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position,your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extendershould be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat BeltExtender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.WARNING!• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit theoriginal seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, thedistance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center ofthe occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injuryor death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not longenough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store theSeat Belt Extender when not needed.Adjustable AnchorageGETTING STARTED25
Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenSeat belts must be worn by all occupantsincluding pregnant women: the risk of in-jury in the event of an accident is reducedfor the mother and the unborn child if theyare wearing a seat belt.Position the lap belt snug and low below theabdomen and across the strong bones ofthe hips. Place the shoulder belt across thechest and away from the neck. Never placethe shoulder belt behind the back or underthe arm.Seat Belt PretensionerThe front seat belt system is equipped withpretensioning devices that are designed toremove slack from the seat belt in the eventof a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removingslack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,including those in child restraints.NOTE:These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. Theseat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately.Energy Management FeatureThis vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the frontseating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in acontrolled manner.Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. Foradditional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The table below defines the type offeature for each seating position.Pregnant Women And Seat BeltsGETTING STARTED26
If the passenger seating position isequipped with an ALR and is being used fornormal usage, only pull the seat belt web-bing out far enough to comfortably wraparound the occupant’s mid-section so as tonot activate the ALR. If the ALR is acti-vated, you will hear a clicking sound as theseat belt retracts. Allow the webbing toretract completely in this case and thencarefully pull out only the amount of web-bing necessary to comfortably wrap aroundthe occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latchplate into the buckle until you hear a "click."In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat beltwill still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Modeanytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with thisfeature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehiclewith a rear seat.WARNING!• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.How To Disengage The Automatic Locking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely todisengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)locking mode.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) LocationsGETTING STARTED27
WARNING!• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly whenchecked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing theseat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used toinstall rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restrainingthe child.Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on somemodels, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorizeddealer.The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant RestraintController (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated withthe electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with thefollowing Air Bag System Components:Air Bag System ComponentsYour vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)• Air Bag Warning Light• Steering Wheel and Column• Instrument Panel• Knee Impact Bolsters• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags• Supplemental Side Air Bags• Supplemental Knee Air Bags• Front and Side Impact Sensors• Seat Belt Pretensioners• Seat Track Position Sensors• Seat Belt Buckle SwitchAir Bag Warning LightThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag systemwhenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch isin the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags willnot inflate.GETTING STARTED28
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system evenif the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximatelyfour to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUNposition. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detectsa malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, eithermomentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes onagain after initial startup.The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air BagWarning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. Thediagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designedto be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer servicethe air bag system immediately.• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when theignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.NOTE:If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, theOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bagsmay not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately.WARNING!Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t havethe air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulbcheck when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if itcomes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immedi-ately.Redundant Air Bag Warning LightIf a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the SupplementalRestraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on theinstrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault iscleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air BagWarning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air BagWarning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorizeddealer service the vehicle immediately.For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to“Warning/Indicator Lights and Messages” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” inyour Owner’s Manual on the DVD.GETTING STARTED29
Front Air BagsThis vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and frontpassenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. Thedriver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRSAIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.WARNING!• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bagdeployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room toinflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel orinstrument panel.• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.Driver and Passenger Front Air Bag FeaturesThe Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determinedby the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the frontimpact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.Front Air Bag Locations1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air BagGETTING STARTED30
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bagdeployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy outputis used for more severe collisions.This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switchthat detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat beltbuckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track positionsensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seatposition.WARNING!• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel orsteering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in acollision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open themmanually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions aredesigned to open only when the air bags are inflating.• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bagswon’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.Front Air Bag OperationFront Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seatbelts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollovercollisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some thatmay produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truckunderrides, and angle offset collisions.On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags maydeploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initialdeceleration.Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed anddamage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should havedeployed.Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to helpkeep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.GETTING STARTED31
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panelseparate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bagsfully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quicklydeflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.Knee Impact BolstersThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, andposition the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.WARNING!• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights,stereos, citizen band radios, etc.Supplemental Driver Knee Air BagThis vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in theinstrument panel below the steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bagprovides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seatbelts, pretensioners, and front air bags.Supplemental Side Air BagsYour vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of thefront seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into theoutboard side of the seats.The SABs may help to reduce the risk ofoccupant injury during certain side im-pacts and/or vehicle rollover events, inaddition to the injury reduction poten-tial provided by the seat belts and bodystructure.When the SAB deploys, it opens theseam on the outboard side of the seat-back’s trim cover. The inflating SABdeploys through the seat seam into thespace between the occupant and thedoor. The SAB moves at a very highspeed and with such a high force that itcould injure occupants if they are notseated properly, or if items are posi-tioned in the area where the SAB in-flates. Children are at an even greaterrisk of injury from a deploying air bag.Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side AirBag LabelGETTING STARTED32
WARNING!Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags;the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you,causing serious injury.2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the sidewindows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”SABICs may help reduce the risk ofhead or other injuries to front and rearseat outboard occupants in certain sideimpacts and/or vehicle rollover events,in addition to the injury reduction po-tential provided by the seat belts andbody structure.The SABICs deploy downward, coveringthe side windows. An inflating SABICpushes the outside edge of the trim outof the way and covers the window. TheSABICs inflate with enough force toinjure occupants if they are not beltedand seated properly, or if items arepositioned in the area where theSABICs inflate. Children are at an evengreater risk of injury from a deployingair bag.WARNING!•Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of theSABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and itsdeployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.•In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in yourvehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) forinstallation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts andcertain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether thedeployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicatorof whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy inless time than it takes to blink your eyes.Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Label LocationGETTING STARTED33
WARNING!• Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags canbe seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on orsleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even ifthey are in an infant or child restraint.• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protectionin all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side AirBag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear theirseat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children mustbe properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for thesize of the child.• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Situpright in the center of the seat.• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to beseverely injured or killed.• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you haveSide Air Bags.GETTING STARTED34
NOTE:Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bagdeployment.Side ImpactsIn side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriateresponse to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on theimpact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection.In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys theleft Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certainangles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front airbags deploy.Rollover EventsSide Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determineswhether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate,based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicatorof whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing systemdetermines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate.In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment ofthe Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat beltpretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupantsthrough side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnect-ing wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:Air Bag System ComponentsYour vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)• Air Bag Warning Light• Steering Wheel and Column• Instrument Panel• Knee Impact Bolsters• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags• Supplemental Side Air Bags• Supplemental Knee Air Bags• Front and Side Impact SensorsGETTING STARTED35
• Seat Belt Pretensioners• Seat Track Position Sensors• Seat Belt Buckle SwitchIf A Deployment OccursThe front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.NOTE:Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the air bag system.If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to theoccupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction ropeburns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are notcaused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have anyblistering, see your doctor immediately.• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are anormal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air baginflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you haveskin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, moveto fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on yourclothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in anothercollision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.WARNING!Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision.Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assembliesreplaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant RestraintController System serviced as well.NOTE:• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bagdeployment.• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.Enhanced Accident Response SystemIn the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the powerremains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether tohave the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:• Cut off fuel to the engine.GETTING STARTED36
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button ispressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button.• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power.• Unlock the power door locks.Enhanced Accident Response System Reset ProcedureIn order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, theignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the groundnear the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting theengine.Maintaining Your Air Bag SystemWARNING!• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you needit. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modifythe components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to thesteering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do notmodify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps orrunning boards.• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tellanyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflateaccidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take yourvehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, includingyour trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal orloosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorizeddealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessaryto modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorizeddealer.Event Data Recorder (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,• How fast the vehicle was traveling.GETTING STARTED37
• These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur.NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no dataare recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.,name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.Child RestraintsEveryone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies andchildren. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires thatsmall children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecutedfor ignoring it.Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seatsrather than in the front.WARNING!In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. Theforce required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you couldnot hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badlyinjured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’ssize.There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the childalmost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manualto make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all theinstructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labelsattached to the child restraint.Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meetsall applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in thevehicle where you will use it.NOTE:• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call 1–888–327–4236.• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional informa-tion: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htmGETTING STARTED38
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In VehiclesChild Size, Height, Weight OrAgeRecommended Type Of ChildRestraintInfants and ToddlersChildren who are two yearsold or younger and who havenot reached the height orweight limits of their childrestraintEither an Infant Carrier or aConvertible Child Restraint,facing rearward in the rearseat of the vehicleSmall ChildrenChildren who are at least twoyears old or who have out-grown the height or weightlimit of their rear-facingchild restraintForward-Facing Child Re-straint with a five-point Har-ness, facing forward in therear seat of the vehicleLarger ChildrenChildren who have out-growntheir forward-facing childrestraint, but are too small toproperly fit the vehicle’s seatbeltBelt Positioning BoosterSeat and the vehicle seatbelt, seated in the rear seatof the vehicleChildren Too Large for ChildRestraintsChildren 12 years old oryounger, who have out-grownthe height or weight limit oftheir booster seatVehicle Seat Belt, seated inthe rear seat of the vehicleInfant And Child RestraintsSafety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are twoyears old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing childrestraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers andconvertible child seats.The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for childrenfrom birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible childseats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible childseats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do,so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but arestill less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reachthe highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.WARNING!• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passengerfront air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat.GETTING STARTED39
Older Children And Child RestraintsChildren who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible childseat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertiblechild seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years oldor who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertiblechild seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as longas possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seatshould use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If thechild cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back isagainst the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child andbelt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.WARNING!• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could comeloose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child re-straint.• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forwardor rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the childrestraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has beenadjusted, reinstall the child restraint.• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt orLATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and causeserious personal injury.Children Too Large For Booster SeatsChildren who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs arelong enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether thechild can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they arestill sitting all the way back?3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not theirstomach?5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?GETTING STARTED40
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a boosterseat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fitperiodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming orslouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seatbelt on the child correctly.WARNING!Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In acrash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in seriousinjury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seatbelt correctly.Recommendations For Attaching Child RestraintsRestraintTypeCombinedWeight of theChild + ChildRestraintUse any attachment method shown with an “X” BelowLATCH –Lower An-chors OnlySeat BeltOnlyLATCH –Lower An-chors + TopTether An-chorSeat Belt +Top TetherAnchorRear-FacingChild Re-straintUp to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) X XRear-FacingChild Re-straintMore than65 lbs(29.5 kg)XForward-Facing ChildRestraintUp to 65 lbs(29.5 kg) XXForward-Facing ChildRestraintMore than65 lbs(29.5 kg)XLower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint SystemGETTING STARTED41
Your vehicle is equipped with the childrestraint anchorage system called LATCH,which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren. The LATCH system has threevehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two loweranchorages located at the back of the seatcushion where it meets the seatback andone top tether anchorage located behindthe seating position. These anchorages areused to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Someseating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In theseseating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install thechild restraint. Please see the following table for more information.LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This VehicleFrequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCHWhat is the weight limit(child’s weight + weight ofthe child restraint) for usingthe LATCH anchorage sys-tem to attach the child re-straint?65 lbs (29.5 kg)Use the LATCH anchoragesystem until the combinedweight of the child and thechild restraint is 65 lbs(29.5 kg). Use the seat beltand tether anchor instead ofthe LATCH system once thecombined weight is morethan 65 lbs (29.5 kg).LATCH LabelLATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-straints In This VehicleLower Anchorage Symbol 2 Anchor-ages Per Seating PositionTop Tether Anchorage SymbolGETTING STARTED42
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCHCan the LATCH anchoragesand the seat belt be usedtogether to attach a rear-facing or forward-facingchild restraint?NoDo not use the seat beltwhen you use the LATCHanchorage system to attacha rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.Can two child restraints beattached using a commonlower LATCH anchorage?NoNever “share” a LATCH an-chorage with two or morechild restraints. If the centerposition does not have dedi-cated LATCH lower anchor-ages, use the seat belt toinstall a child seat in thecenter position next to achild seat using the LATCHanchorages in an outboardposition.Can the rear-facing childrestraint touch the back ofthe front passenger seat?YesThe child seat may touchthe back of the front passen-ger seat if the child restraintmanufacturer also allowscontact. See your child re-straint owner’s manual formore information.Can the head restraints beremoved? Yes Center position only may beremoved.Locating LATCH AnchoragesThe lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushionwhere it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are justvisible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feelthem if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.Locating Tether AnchoragesThere are tether strap anchorages be-hind each rear seating position located inthe panel between the rear seatback andthe rear window. They are found under aplastic cover with the tether anchoragesymbol on it.LATCH AnchoragesGETTING STARTED43
LATCH-compatible child restraint systemswill be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexiblestrap on each side. Each will have a hook orconnector to attach to the lower anchorageand a way to tighten the connection to theanchorage. Forward-facing child restraintsand some rear-facing child restraints willalso be equipped with a tether strap. Thetether strap will have a hook at the end toattach to the top tether anchorage and away to tighten the strap after it is attachedto the anchorage.Center Seat LATCHIf a child restraint installed in the centerposition blocks the seat belt webbing orbuckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in thecenter position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seatin that outboard position.WARNING!Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Pleaserefer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical instal-lation instructions.Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your childrestraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child RestraintIf the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seatbelt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing ChildRestraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seatingposition has.1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so thatyou can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For somesecond row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint toget a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, youmay wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You mayalso move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages inthe selected seating position.Tether Strap AnchoragesGETTING STARTED44
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See thesection “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions toattach a tether anchor.5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into theseat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the childseat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat BeltWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat beltsthat are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. Anunused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat beltretractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat beltbehind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interfereswith the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, routethe seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they shouldnot play with them.WARNING!• Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adultseat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat BeltChild restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lapbelt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.WARNING!• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a SwitchableAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belttight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALRretractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of theGETTING STARTED45
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, theALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Referto the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additionalinformation on ALR.Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This VehicleFrequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat BeltsWhat is the weight limit(child’s weight + weight ofthe child restraint) for usingthe Tether Anchor with theseat belt to attach a forwardfacing child restraint?Weight limit of the ChildRestraintAlways use the tether anchorwhen using the seat belt toinstall a forward facing childrestraint, up to the recom-mended weight limit of thechild restraint.Can the rear-facing childrestraint touch the back ofthe front passenger seat?YesContact between the frontpassenger seat and the childrestraint is allowed, if thechild restraint manufactureralso allows contact.Can the head restraints beremoved? Yes Center Only may be re-moved.Can the buckle stalk betwisted to tighten the seatbelt against the belt path ofthe child restraint?NoDo not twist the buckle stalkin a seating position with anALR retractor.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) LocationsALR = Switchable Automatic LockingRetractorTop Tether Anchorage SymbolGETTING STARTED46
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lapbelt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.WARNING!• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failureof the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infantor child restraint.1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt pathof the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulledall the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract backinto the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This meansthe seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pullout any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the childrestraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicleseat.8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tetheranchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Seethe section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directionsto attach a tether anchor.9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the childseat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tightif necessary.GETTING STARTED47
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether AnchorageWARNING!Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the carseat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of arear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position,located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchoragesin your vehicle.1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find thetether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access tothe tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, movethe child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you areplacing the child restraint.3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchorand the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the headrestraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and passthe tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint.4. Attach the tether strap hook of the childrestraint to the top tether anchorage asshown in the diagram.5. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-ing to the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.Tether Strap Attachment1 — Cover3 — Attaching StrapA — Tether Strap HookB — Tether AnchorGETTING STARTED48
WARNING!• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion andpossible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the childseat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does notslip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap.Center Tether Attachment1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full down position.2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head restraint.3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the center tether anchoragelocated in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.Transporting PetsAir Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will bethrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in acollision.Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are securedby seat belts.HEAD RESTRAINTSHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement inthe event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the headrestraint is located above the top of your ear.WARNING!• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’sseat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimizethe risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving avehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause seriousinjury or death in the event of a collision.GETTING STARTED49
NOTE:Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) inan attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.Reactive Head Restraints — Front SeatsThe front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR).In the event of a rear impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward minimizing thegap between the back of the occupants head and the RHR.The RHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If theRHRs do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealer immediately.To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downwardon the head restraint.NOTE:To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then push the release button andthe adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Toreinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and pushdownward. Then adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.WARNING!• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause seriousinjury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed headrestraints in a location outside the occupant compartment.• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect theoccupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicleor occupying a seat.• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seatcovers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of theReactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injuryor death.Rear Head RestraintsThe center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up or down. When the center seatis being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised position. When there are nooccupants in the center seat the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility forthe driver.To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and push downwardon the head restraint.GETTING STARTED50
NOTE:• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for servicepurposes only. If the center rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorizeddealer.• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.SEATINGFRONT SEATSPower SeatsOn models equipped with power seats, the switch is located on the outboard side of theseat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver's seat up, down, forward, rearwardor to recline the seatback.Adjusting The Seat Forward Or RearwardThe seat can be adjusted both forward andrearward. Push the seat switch forward orrearward. The seat will move in the direc-tion of the switch. Release the switch whenthe desired position has been reached.Adjusting The Seat Up Or DownThe height of the seats can be adjusted upor down. Pull upward or push downward onthe seat switch. The seat will move in thedirection of the switch. Release the switchwhen the desired position is reached.Tilting The Seat Up Or DownThe angle of the seat cushion can be ad-justed in four directions. Pull upward orpush downward on the front or rear of theseat switch, the front or rear of the seatcushion will move in the direction of theswitch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.Reclining The SeatbackThe angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switchforward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switchwhen the desired position is reached.Power Seat Switches1 — Seatback Control2 — Seat ControlGETTING STARTED51
WARNING!• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving couldresult in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle isparked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer restingagainst your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which couldresult in serious injury or death.CAUTION!Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may causedamage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stoppedby an obstruction in the seat’s path.Power LumbarVehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may also be equipped with powerlumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Pushthe switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push theswitch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.Memory SeatThis feature allows the driver to store up totwo different memory profiles for easy recallthrough a memory switch. Each memoryprofile contains desired position settings forthe driver seat, side mirrors, and power tiltand telescopic steering column (ifequipped) and a set of desired radio stationpresets. Your remote keyless entry key fobcan also be programmed to recall the samepositions when the unlock button ispushed.NOTE:If your vehicle is equipped with two keyfobs, one key fob can be linked to memoryposition 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2.The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists ofthree buttons: The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function and the(1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two pre-programmed memoryprofiles.Power Lumbar SwitchGETTING STARTED52
Programming The Memory FeatureNOTE:Saving a new memory profile will erase anexisting profile from memory.To create a new memory profile, perform thefollowing:1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position.2. Adjust all memory profile settings todesired preferences (i.e., seat, side mir-ror, power tilt and telescopic steeringcolumn [if equipped], and radio stationpresets).3. Push and release the SET (S) button onthe memory switch.4. Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY button 1 or 2. The instrumentcluster display will show which memory position has been set.NOTE:• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be inPARK to recall a memory profile.• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to “Linking And Unlinking The RemoteKeyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To MemoryYour key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profilesby pushing the unlock button on the key fob.NOTE:Before programming your key fobs you must select the “Memory To FOB” or “PersonalSettings Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to “UconnectSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.To program your key fobs, perform the following:1. Place the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system will recall any stored settings forthis profile. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing toStep 3.Memory Seat SwitchesGETTING STARTED53
NOTE:If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on thememory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory ProfileSet” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display.4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.NOTE:Your key fobs can be unlinked from your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button,and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.Memory Position RecallNOTE:The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when thevehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in the instrument cluster display.To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push MEMORY button number 1 on the driver'sdoor or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1.NOTE:If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory settings will be recalled with aPassive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key fob linked to position 1.To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY button number 2 on the driver'sdoor or the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2.GETTING STARTED54
NOTE:If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the memory settings will be recalled with aPassive Entry Unlock into the driver's door using the key fob linked to position 2.A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on thedriver's door during a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver's seat, adjustable pedals(if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. Adelay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.Easy Entry/Exit SeatThis feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility whenentering and exiting the vehicle.The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positionedwhen you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position, the driver seat will moveabout 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equalto 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previouslyset position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN position.• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit tothe driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.NOTE:The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory.The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmablefeatures in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer ProgrammableFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVDfor further information.Manual Seat AdjustmentsForward Or Rearward AdjustmentThe adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move theseat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. Usingbody pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjustershave latched.GETTING STARTED55
WARNING!Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of theseat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be properly adjusted andyou could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.ReclineTo adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back tothe desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, leanforward and release the lever.WARNING!Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer restingagainst your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could resultin serious injury or death.REAR SEATSFolding Rear SeatThe rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold therear seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper seatback.NOTE:These loops can be tucked away when not in use.Manual Seat Adjustment1 — Recliner Lever2 — Adjustment BarGETTING STARTED56
After releasing the seatback, it can befolded forward.NOTE:You may experience deformation in the seatcushion from the seat belt buckles if theseats are left folded for an extended periodof time. This is normal and by simply open-ing the seats to the open position, over timethe seat cushion will return to its normalshape.When the seatback is folded to the uprightposition, make sure it is latched by stronglypulling on the top of the seatback above theseat strap.WARNING!• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is notsecurely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for childseats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up orfolded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicleis in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children should be seatedand using the proper restraint system.HEATED SEATSOn some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seatcushions and seatbacks.The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated using the Uconnect System.WARNING!• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat thathas been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surfacetemperature of the seat.Rear Seat LoopGETTING STARTED57
Front Heated SeatsThe front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen ofthe touchscreen.You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator arrows in touchscreenbuttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for HI, onefor LO and none for OFF.• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting ON.• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting ON.• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will changefrom HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automaticallyafter approximately 45 minutes.NOTE:• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s heated seat can be pro-grammed to come on during a remote start.This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “UconnectSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.WARNING!• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or otherphysical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat thathas been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surfacetemperature of the seat.Rear Heated SeatsOn some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seatswitches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. There are two heatedseat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently.You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The indicator lights in each switchindicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO andnone for OFF.GETTING STARTED58
• Push the heated seat button once to select HI-level heating.• Push the heated seat button a second time to select LO-level heating.• Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements OFF.NOTE:• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.• The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level afterapproximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illumi-nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turnOFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.FRONT VENTILATED SEATSIf your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, the seat cushion and seat back will havefans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fineperforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higherambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. Youcan gain access to the control buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to turn the ventilated seat OFF.GETTING STARTED59
NOTE:The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s ventilated seat can beprogrammed to come on during a remote start.This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “UconnectSettings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD.HEATED STEERING WHEELThe steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in coldweather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heatedsteering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes beforeautomatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. Theheated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel isalready warm.The heated steering wheel control button is located within the Uconnect system. You cangain access to the control button through the climate screen or the controls screen.• Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element ON.• Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating elementOFF.NOTE:The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.Vehicles Equipped With Remote StartOn models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can beprogrammed to come on during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manualon the DVD for further information.WARNING!• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronicillness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or otherphysical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It maycause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as ablanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause thesteering wheel heater to overheat.GETTING STARTED60
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMNManual Tilt/Telescoping Steering ColumnThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows youto lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below thesteering wheel at the end of the steering column.To unlock the steering column, pull thelever downward. To tilt the steering column,move the steering wheel upward or down-ward as desired. To lengthen or shorten thesteering column, pull the steering wheeloutward or push it inward as desired. Tolock the steering column in position, pushthe lever upward until fully engaged.WARNING!Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury ordeath.Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering ColumnThis feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows youto lengthen or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping steering columnlever is located below the multifunction lever on the steering column.Manual Tilt/Telescoping Control HandleGETTING STARTED61
To tilt the steering column, move the leverup or down as desired. To lengthen orshorten the steering column, pull the levertoward you or push the lever away from youas desired.WARNING!Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column whiledriving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury ordeath.Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering ControlGETTING STARTED62
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS3.6L Engine Break-InFor vehicles equipped with the 3.6L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, andrear axle) in your new vehicle.Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic lawscontributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear canbe detrimental and should be avoided.The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-qualityand energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent withanticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For therecommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-taining Your Vehicle” in this guide.CAUTION!Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage mayresult.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE63
NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) ofoperation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted asan indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator oftenduring the break in period. Add oil as required.5.7L Engine Break-InFor vehicles equipped with the 5.7L, use the following engine break-in recommendations:A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, andrear axle) in your new vehicle.Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic lawscontributes to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear canbe detrimental and should be avoided.The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant installed at the factory is high-qualityand energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be consistent withanticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For therecommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Main-taining Your Vehicle” in this guide.CAUTION!Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage mayresult.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE64
NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) ofoperation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted asan indication of difficulty. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator oftenduring the break in period. Add oil as required.6.4L Engine Break-InFor vehicles equipped with the 6.4L use the following engine break-in recommendations:Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts ofthe vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during thenew vehicle break-in period:0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-tion.• Avoid aggressive braking.• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).• Avoid aggressive braking.• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higherrpms when possible.• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during thefirst 1500 miles (2414 km).OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE65
NOTE:Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption maybe higher through the first oil change interval.6.2L Engine Break-InFor vehicles equipped with the 6.2L SRT Engine, use the following engine break-inrecommendations. This procedure will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance andmaximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts ofthe vehicle must still wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly during the first500 miles (805 km) and continues through the first oil change interval.It is recommended for the operator to observe the following driving behaviors during thenew vehicle break-in period:0 to 100 miles (0 to 160 km):• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an extended period of time.• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-tion.• Avoid aggressive braking.• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km):• Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).• Avoid aggressive braking.• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) at higherrpms when possible.• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.For the first 1500 miles (2414 km):• Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities during thefirst 1500 miles (2414 km).OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE66
NOTE:Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption maybe higher through the first oil change interval.TURN SIGNAL/WIPER/WASHER/HIGH BEAM LEVERTurn Signal/Lane Change AssistTap the lever up or down once and the turnsignal (right or left) will flash three times.Then, it will turn off automatically.Front WipersIntermittent, Low And High OperationRotate the end of the lever to the first detentposition for one of four intermittent set-tings, the second detent for low wiper op-eration and the third detent for high wiperoperation.MistRotate the end of the lever rearward when asingle wipe is desired.Multifunction Lever1 — Push For Washer2 — Rotate Downward For Mist3 — Push Lever For High BeamsOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE67
NOTE:The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will besprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be activated in order to spray thewindshield with washer fluid.Washer OperationPush the end of the lever inward and hold for as long as spray is desired.Rain Sensing WipersThis feature senses moisture on the vehicle's windshield and automatically activates thewipers for the driver when the switch is in the intermittent position. Rotate the end of thelever to one of four settings to activate this feature and adjust sensitivity.Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to the Owner'sManual on the DVD for further details.High Beam OperationPush the lever forward to activate the high beams. Pull the lever toward you for flash topass.NOTE:For safe driving, turn off the high beams when oncoming traffic is present to preventheadlight glare and as a courtesy to other motorists.HEADLIGHT SWITCHAutomatic Headlights/Parking Lights/Headlights• Rotate the headlight switch, located onthe instrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel, to the first detent fromthe off position for parking light andto the second detent for headlight .• With the parking lights or low beamheadlights on, push the headlight switchfor front fog lights. Pushing the switch asecond time will deactivate the front foglights. Turning the headlight switch offwill also deactivate the front fog lights.• Rotate the headlight switch to “AUTO”for AUTO headlights.• When set to AUTO, the system automati-cally turns the headlights on or off basedon ambient light levels.Headlight Switch1 — Automatic Headlights2 — Rotate Headlight Switch3 — Rotate Dimmer4 — Rotate AmbientOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE68
Automatic High BeamsThe Automatic High Beams system provides increased forward lighting at night byautomating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted above theinside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automaticallyswitches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. Thisfeature is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for furtherdetails.Instrument Panel Dimmer• Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrumentpanel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.• Rotate the dimmer control up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel andcupholders when the parking lights or headlights are on.• Rotate the dimmer control up to the next detent position to fully brighten the odometerand radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.• Rotate the dimmer control up to the last detent position to turn on the interior lighting.• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming is programmable throughthe Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” in the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.Ambient Light Dimmer• Rotate the ambient light control up or down to increase or decrease the brightness ofthe release handle, map pocket (if equipped), overhead and floor lighting when theparking lights or headlights are on.• Rotate to extreme bottom position to turn off.ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROLWhen engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speedsgreater than 25 mph (40 km/h).The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE69
NOTE:In order to ensure proper operation, theElectronic Speed Control System has beendesigned to shut down if multiple speedcontrol functions are operated at the sametime. If this occurs, the Electronic SpeedControl System can be reactivated by push-ing the Electronic Speed Control on/off but-ton and resetting the desired vehicle setspeed.To ActivatePush the on/off button to activate the Elec-tronic Speed Control. CRUISE CONTROLREADY will appear on the instrument clus-ter display to indicate the electronic speedcontrol is on. To turn the system off, pushthe on/off button a second time. CRUISECONTROL OFF will appear on the instru-ment cluster display to indicate the elec-tronic speed control is off. The systemshould be turned off when not in use.WARNING!Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. Youcould accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could losecontrol and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.To Set A Desired SpeedTurn the Electronic Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehiclewill operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message CRUISECONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A cruiseindicator lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay on in the instrument clusterdisplay when the speed is set.To DeactivateA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button or normal brake pressure whileslowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the setspeed from memory.Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the OFF position erases the set speedfrom memory.Electronic Speed Control Switches1 — Push Cancel2 — Push Set+/Accel3 — Push Resume4 — Push On/Off5 — Push Set-/DecelOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE70
To Resume SpeedTo resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can beused at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).To Vary The Speed SettingTo Increase SpeedWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +button.The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on theDVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speedunit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):U.S. Speed (mph)• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speed will be established.Metric Speed (km/h)• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until thebutton is released, then the new set speed will be established.To Decrease SpeedWhen the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET -button.The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on theDVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speedunit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):U.S. Speed (mph)• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released, then the new set speed will be established.Metric Speed (km/h)• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE71
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until thebutton is released, then the new set speed will be established.To Accelerate For PassingPress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle willreturn to the set speed.Using Electronic Speed Control On HillsThe transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.NOTE:The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speedchange on moderate hills is normal.On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drivewithout Electronic Speed Control.WARNING!Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain aconstant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could losecontrol and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or onroads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE72
If your vehicle is equipped with AdaptiveCruise Control, the controls operate exactlythe same as the electronic speed controlwith only a couple of differences. With thisoption, you can set a specified distance youwould like to maintain between you and thevehicle in front of you.If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,ACC will apply limited braking or accelera-tion automatically to maintain a preset fol-lowing distance, while matching the speedof the vehicle ahead.If the sensor does not detect a vehicleahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed setspeed.ACC On/Off• Push and release the Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) on/off button.ACC READY will appear in the instrumentcluster display to indicate the ACC is on.• Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button a second time to turnthe system off.Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off will appear in the instrument cluster display to indicatethe ACC is off.To Vary The Speed SettingTo Increase SpeedWhile ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET +button.The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on theDVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:U.S. Speed (mph)• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mphincrements until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.Metric Speed (km/h)Adaptive Cruise Switches1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off2 — Distance Setting – Decrease3 — Distance Setting – IncreaseOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE73
• Pushing the SET +button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/hincrements until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.To Decrease SpeedWhile ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET -button.The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings ifequipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on theDVD for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:U.S. Speed (mph)• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mphdecrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.Metric Speed (km/h)• Pushing the SET -button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Eachsubsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/hdecrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in theinstrument cluster display.NOTE:• When you override and push the SET +button or SET -buttons, the new Set Speed willbe the current speed of the vehicle.• When you use the SET -button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does notslow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automaticallyslow the vehicle.• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following a target vehicle.If an ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle willrelease the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, aslight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occurwhile climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessaryto maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancelif the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE74
Distance Setting (ACC Only)The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance settingbetween four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distanceto the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.• To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Increase button andrelease. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar(longer).• To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Decrease button andrelease. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar(shorter).Changing Modes (ACC Only)If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can be turned off and the system can beoperated as a normal (Fixed Speed) Speed Control mode. When in the normal (FixedSpeed) Speed Control mode the distance setting feature will be disabled and the systemwill maintain the speed you set.• To change between the different cruise control modes, push the ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC and the normal (Fixed Speed)Speed Control off.• Pushing the normal (Fixed Speed) SPEED CONTROL on/off button will result in turningon (changing to) the normal (Fixed Speed) Speed Control mode.Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further information.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE75
WARNING!Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for activedriving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road,traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, mostimportantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all roadconditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safecontrol of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision anddeath or serious personal injury.The ACC system:• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., astopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limitedupon adverse sight distance conditions.• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result inwrong or missing distance warnings.• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold thevehicle for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start movingwithin two seconds the ACC system will display a message that the system willrelease the brakes and that the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chimewill sound when the brakes are released.You should switch off the ACC system:• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex drivingsituations (i.e., in highway construction zones).• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that arewinding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.The Cruise Control system has two control modes:• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance betweenvehicles.• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode for cruising at a constant presetspeed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise ControlMode” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control will not react to preceding vehicles.Always be aware of the mode selected.You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control buttons. The two control modesfunction differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides the driver with audible warningsand visual warnings within the instrument cluster display, to warn the driver when itdetects a potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the driver withenough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE76
NOTE:FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the ElectronicBrake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When thesystem determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided withaudible and visual warnings.Turning FCW On Or OffThe forward collision button is located in the Uconnect display in the controls settings.When FCW is selected "Off", there will be an "FCW OFF" icon that appears in theinstrument cluster display.NOTE:• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you.• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the system from warning you of a possiblecollision with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will bedisplayed in the instrument cluster display.Changing FCW StatusThe FCW feature has two settings and can be changed within the Uconnect SystemScreen:• Far• NearFarThe default status of FCW is the “Far” setting.The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of thevehicle, allowing the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a collision.More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.NOTE:This setting gives you the most reaction time.NearChanging the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of apotential frontal collision when you are much closer.This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting, which allows for a moredynamic driving experience.More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer thissetting.Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE77
WARNING!Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor canFCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoida collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow thiswarning could lead to serious injury or death.LANESENSEThe LaneSense system can be enabled and disabled with the LaneSense button, locatedon the switch panel below the Uconnect display.• Push the LaneSense button to turn the system on (LED turns off).The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detectlane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form oftorque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the laneboundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSensesystem provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt thedriver to remain within the lane boundaries.The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steeringwheel at any time.When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts acrossthe lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warningthrough the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane.When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not beprovided.Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE78
NOTE:When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if thedriver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the driverwhen the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel ifthe driver does not return their hands to the wheel.PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERAYour vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you tosee an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selectoris put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above therear license plate. The image will be displayed in the touchscreen display along with acaution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After fiveseconds, this note will disappear.NOTE:The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may beselected through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature and it is turned on, the rearcamera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out ofREVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmissionis shifted into "PARK" or the vehicle's ignition is cycled to the OFF position.When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rearcamera mode is exited and the last touchscreen appears again.When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of thevehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The activeguide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of thevehicle.Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.WARNING!Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back UpCamera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check forpedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to payattention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE79
CAUTION!• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. TheParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView tobe able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driverlook frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.NOTE:If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSISTThe ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distancebetween the rear bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parkingmaneuver.ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch, located on the switchpanel below the Uconnect display.NOTE:ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignitioncycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense isenabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speedis increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. The system will become activeagain if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behindthe vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.NOTE:• The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to79 inches (200 cm) from the rear bumper while the vehicle is in REVERSE, a warningwill display in the instrument cluster display only when “Sound and Display” isselected from the Uconnect System.• As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the instrument cluster display will showfewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.Refer to your Owner's Manual on the DVD for further details.BLIND SPOT MONITORINGThe Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rearbumper fascia, to detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcyclesetc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE80
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extendsapproximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM systemmonitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reachesapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in theseareas.When the vehicle is started, the BSM warn-ing light will momentarily illuminate in bothoutside rear view mirrors to let the driverknow that the system is operational. TheBSM system sensors operate when the ve-hicle is in any forward gear or REVERSEand enters standby mode when the vehicleis in PARK.The BSM warning light, located in the out-side mirrors, will illuminate if a vehiclemoves into a blind spot zone.The BSM system can also be configured tosound an audible (chime) alert and mutethe radio to notify you of objects that haveentered the detection zones.Rear Cross Path (RCP)The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-tended to aid the driver when backing out ofparking spaces where the vision of oncom-ing vehicles may be blocked. Proceedslowly and cautiously out of the parkingspace until the rear end of the vehicle isexposed. The RCP system will then have aclear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the visualand audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” in theOwner's Manual on the DVD for more information.Modes Of OperationThree selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect System. Refer to“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)Rear Detection ZonesBlind Spot MirrorOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE81
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in theappropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system isoperating in Rear Cross Path mode, the system will respond with both visual and audiblealerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radiovolume is reduced.Blind Spot Alert Lights/ChimeWhen operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide avisual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turnsignal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle,an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object arepresent on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued.In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will be reduced.NOTE:• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio volume isreduced.• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request the appropriate visual alert only.When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alertswhen a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radiovolume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests thechime.Blind Spot Alert OffWhen the BSM system is turned off, there will be no visual or audible alerts from either theBSM or RCP systems.NOTE:The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Eachtime the vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONThe transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both on the gear selector and in theinstrument cluster.To select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear selector and move the selectorrearward or forward. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be runningand the brake pedal must be pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to shift fromNEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE82
The electronically-controlled transmissionadapts its shift schedule based on driverinputs, along with environmental and roadconditions. The transmission electronicsare self-calibrating; therefore, the first fewshifts on a new vehicle may be somewhatabrupt. This is a normal condition, andprecision shifts will develop within a fewhundred miles (kilometers).Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or RE-VERSE when the accelerator pedal is re-leased and the vehicle is stopped. Be sureto keep your foot on the brake pedal whenshifting between these gears.The transmission gear selector has PARK,REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, andMANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.Manual shifts can be made using theAutostick shift control (refer to “AutoStick”in this section for further information). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward(+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position) will manuallyselect the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster asM1, M2, M3, etc.Transmission Gear Selector1 — Lock Button2 — Gear SelectorOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE83
NOTE:If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (whenpushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-) position (beside the DRIVEposition). In MANUAL (AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in theinstrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the gear selector to the right (into theDRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.Refer to Automatic Transmission in the Owner’s Manual on your DVD for furtherinformation.AUTOSTICK/STEERING WHEEL MOUNTED PADDLE SHIFTERSAutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature that offers manual gear shifting toprovide you with more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize enginebraking, and improve overall vehicle performance.This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, coldslippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.OperationWhen the gear selector is in the DRIVE (D) position, the transmission will operateautomatically, shifting between the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move thegear selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the DRIVE position). The currenttransmission gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted "M"(Manual) indication. When the gear selector is in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the gearselector forward (-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if equipped) todownshift the transmission to the next lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the(+) shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.NOTE:• Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped,while the gear selector is in DRIVE, willactivate a temporary AutoStick mode.Tapping (-) to enter AutoStick mode willdownshift the transmission to the nextlower gear, while tapping (+) to enterAutoStick mode will retain the currentgear. The current gear will be displayedin the instrument cluster, but the "M" willnot be highlighted. The transmission willrevert back to normal operation (if thegear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedalactivity.• In some models, the shift paddles may be disabled (or re-enabled, as desired) using theUconnect Personal Settings.Shifter Paddles1 — (–) ShiftPaddle2 — (+) ShiftPaddleOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE84
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selectedby the driver (using the gear selector, or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an enginelugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear untilanother upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.• In temporary AutoStick mode (gear selector in DRIVE), the transmission will automati-cally shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is fullydepressed, the transmission will downshift when possible (based on current vehiclespeed and gear, except 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will cause thetransmission to revert to automatic operation.• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (gear selector in MANUAL position), manual gearselection will be maintained until the gear selector is returned to DRIVE, or asdescribed below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in thismode, nor will downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the floor.• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent enginelugging) and will display the current gear.• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. Aftera stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle isaccelerated.• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allowstarting in second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snowy or icyconditions.• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed.• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or holding the gear selector in the (-)position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the currentspeed.• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition isdetected.To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position, or press andhold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector is already in DRIVE) until “D”is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStickmode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.WARNING!Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheelscould lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE85
SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE CONTROLYour vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This mode is a configuration set upfor typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems are all set totheir SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response and modifiedshifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering feel.This mode may be activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on theinstrument panel switch bank.For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER TRACK PACK” button, refer to“Performance Control — If Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderstandingYour Instrument Panel” on your DVD or in the “Drive Mode Supplement” within yourOwners information kit for further information.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE86
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLSUconnect 5.0 Manual Climate Controls1 — MAX A/C Button2 — A/C Button3 — Air Recirculation Button4 — Front Defroster Button5 — Rear Defroster Button6 — Mode Control Button7 — Climate Control Button8 — OFF Button9 — Sync Button10 — Temperature Control Button11 — Blower Control ButtonOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE87
SYNC Temperature Button• Press the “SYNC” button once to control driver and passenger temperatures simulta-neously.• Press the “SYNC” button a second time to control the temperatures individually.Air Recirculation• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.• Recirculation is allowed in floor mode and defrost/floor (mix mode) for approximatelyfive minutes.Heated MirrorsThe mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn onthe rear window defroster.Manual Climate Controls1 — FRONT Defroster Button2 — Driver Temperature Up3 — Blower Control Knob4 — Passenger Temperature Up5 — A/C Button6 — Air Recirculation Button7 — Passenger Temperature Down8 — Off Button9 — Driver Temperature Down10 — REAR Window Defroster ButtonOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE88
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS (ATC)Uconnect 8.4 Touchscreen Automatic Climate Controls1 — MAX A/C Button2 — A/C Button3 — Air Recirculation Button4 — AUTO Button5 — FRONT Defroster Button6 — REAR Defroster Button7 — Passenger Temperature Up8 — Passenger Temperature Down9 — SYNC Button10 — Blower Control Buttons11 — Mode Control Buttons12 — OFF Button13 — Driver Temperature Down14 — Driver Temperature UpOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE89
Automatic OperationThe climate system will automatically adjust settings to achieve and maintain comfort.• Press the AUTO button.• Select the desired temperature by pushing the Temperature Controls for the driverand/or passenger.Air Conditioning (A/C)If the air conditioning button is pressed while in AUTO mode, the system will exit AUTOmode and stay in A/C. The mode and blower will be set at the closest mode and blowerposition that the system was operating in AUTO.MAX A/CMAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.Automatic Climate Controls1 — FRONT Defroster Button2 — Driver Temperature Up3 — Blower Control Knob4 — Passenger Temperature Up5 — A/C Button6 — Air Recirculation Button7 — Passenger Temperature Down8 — Off Button9 — AUTO Button10 — Driver Temperature Down11 — REAR Window Defroster ButtonOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE90
• Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button on thetouchscreen illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior settings andthe MAX A/C indicator will turn off.SYNC Temperature Button• Press the “SYNC” button once to control driver and passenger temperatures simulta-neously.• Press the “SYNC” button a second time to control the temperatures individually.Air Recirculation• Use Recirculation for maximum A/C operation.• For window defogging, turn the Recirculation button off.• If the Recirculation button is pushed while in the AUTO mode, the indicator light mayflash three times to indicate the cabin air is being controlled automatically. TheRecirculation button will be greyed out in these conditions.Heated MirrorsThe mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn onthe rear window defroster.POWER SUNROOFThe power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console.Opening SunroofExpress OpenPush the switch rearward and release itwithin one-half second. The sunroof willfully open and stop automatically.Manual OpenPush and hold the switch rearward to openthe sunroof. Any release of the switch willstop the movement, and the sunroof willremain in a partially open position until theswitch is pushed again.Venting SunroofPush and release the button and the sun-roof will open to the vent position.Power Sunroof Switch1 — Opening Sunroof2 — Venting Sunroof3 — Closing SunroofOPERATING YOUR VEHICLE91
This is called “Express Vent” and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During ExpressVent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.Closing SunroofExpress ClosingPush the switch forward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will fully closeautomatically from any position.Manual ClosingPush and hold the switch forward to close the sunroof. Any release of the switch will stopthe movement, and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed position until the switchis pushed again.Pinch Protection FeatureThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Closeoperation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof willautomatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switchforward and release to Express Close.NOTE:If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourthclose attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.WARNING!• Do not let children play with the sunroof. Never leave children unattended in avehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near thevehicle, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Goin the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, canbecome entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch.Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an opensunroof. You could also be severely injured or killed. Always fasten your seat beltproperly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, otherbody parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result.WIND BUFFETINGWind buffeting can be described as a helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffetingoccurs with the rear windows open, adjust the front and rear windows together.If buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening, or adjust anywindow. This will minimize buffeting.OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE92
OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE93
YOUR VEHICLE'S SOUND SYSTEM1. Uconnect Phone Button pg. 1482. Uconnect Voice Command Button pg. 1113. Phone Hang Up Button4. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Left – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 1565. Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Right – Behind Steering Wheel) pg. 1566. Volume Knob/Mute ButtonELECTRONICS94
7. Uconnect Radio pg. 968. Tune/Scroll Knob/Browse/Enter Button9. Power Outlet pg. 16410. USB Port pg. 12311. AUX Jack pg. 12312. USB Port pg. 123CYBERSECURITYYour vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired andwireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information.This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk ofunauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working withELECTRONICS95
its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer orother devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability andperformance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawfulaccess to your vehicle systems.The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, evenif the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.WARNING!• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’ssystems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safetyrelated systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that mayresult in an accident involving serious injury or death.• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from atrusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software,and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems tobe breached.• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to yournearest authorized dealer immediately.NOTE:• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a securitybreach, vehicle owners should:• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-update to learn about availableUconnect software updates.• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs,CDs).Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties mayunlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. Forfurther information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in“Uconnect + SiriusXM Guardian” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in your Owner’s Manual.IDENTIFYING YOUR RADIOUconnect 5.0ELECTRONICS96
• 5” Touchscreen• Three buttons on the faceplate on eitherside of the displayUconnect 8.4• 8.4” Touchscreen• HD Button will NOT be visible on rightside of screen when viewing AM or FM• SiriusXM Travel Link feature NOT listedwithin AppsUconnect 8.4 NAV• 8.4” Touchscreen• HD Button will be visible on right side ofscreen when viewing AM or FM• SiriusXM Travel Link feature listedwithin AppsUconnect 5.0Uconnect 8.4Uconnect 8.4 NAVELECTRONICS97
SIRIUSXM GUARDIANSiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped (Available on Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV — U.S.Residents Only)WARNING!• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some SiriusXM Guardianservices, including a SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will NOT work withoutan operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.• ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-bility and assume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardianfeatures and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.NOTE:Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and driving experience by connecting yourvehicle to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. When connected to anoperable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, you can:• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian operator who can connect you to emergencyresponders.• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your vehicle from virtually anywhere, usingthe SiriusXM Guardian App from your device. You can also do so by logging into yourowner site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care when your vehicle has an operable LTE(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection. Services can only be used wherecoverage is available; see coverage map for details.• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's security alarm goes off.• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate yourvehicle if it is stolen.• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button on your interior rearview mirror.Before you dive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are located on your rearview mirror. The ASSISTbutton is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM GuardianCare, and Uconnect Care. The SOS Call button connects you to a SiriusXM GuardianCare Agent, who can connect you to emergency services.ELECTRONICS98
NOTE:Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS Callor other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond toSOS system calls.2. The Uconnect “Apps ” button is located in the center of the menu bar of the radiotouchscreen. This is where you can manage your Apps.3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect Phone buttons are located on the leftside of your steering wheel. These buttons let you use your voice to give commands,make phone calls, send and receive text messages hands-free, enter navigationdestinations, and control your radio and media devices.Included Trial Period For New VehiclesYour new vehicle may come with an included trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardianservices starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notificationfrom your dealer). To activate the trial, you must first register with SiriusXM Guardian.After the trial period, if you wish to continue your SiriusXM Guardian services you canchoose to purchase a subscription.SiriusXM Guardian Registration (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 ContiguousStates, Alaska And Hawaii)To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you first need to registerwith SiriusXM Guardian.1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.2. Press the “Activate” button on thetouchscreen.3. Select “Customer Care” and a helpfulSiriusXM Guardian Care Agent will reg-ister your vehicle and handle all of thedetails.Signing up is easy! Simply follow the stepsabove. Or, press the “Apps ” button onthe touchscreen, then select the Uconnectregistration app to “Register By Web” andcomplete the process using your device orcomputer.Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Hereare just a few examples of things you’ll beable to do:• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press away.• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds of miles away.• Find your vehicle, no matter where you parked, using the convenient Vehicle Finderfunction.ASSIST ButtonELECTRONICS99
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route from your mobile phone to your vehicle’snavigation system.For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.Download The SiriusXM Guardian AppYou’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite musicin your vehicle.To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App toyour mobile device.• Press the “Info” button on the bottommenu bar of the app for Vehicle Info.• Press the “Remote” button on the bot-tom menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock,Remote Start, and activate your hornand lights remotely.• Press the “Location” button on the bot-tom menu bar of the app to bring up amap to locate your vehicle or send alocation to your vehicle’s navigation sys-tem.• Press the “Settings” button in the upperleft corner of the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist Call Centers.NOTE:For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.Vehicle FinderThe Vehicle Finder feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to find thelocation of your vehicle when you have lost it. You can also sound the alarm and flash thelights to make finding your vehicle even easier.To find your vehicle:1. Press the “Location” tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the location of your vehicle.3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.4. Select your preferred Navigation App to route a path to your vehicle.Send & GoThe Send ‘N Go feature of the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App allows you to search for adestination on your mobile device and then send the route to your vehicle’s nativenavigation system.Mobile AppELECTRONICS100
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:1. Press the “Location tab on the SiriusXM Guardian Mobile App bottom bar.2. Either type in the destination you would like to navigate to, or search through one of thecategories provided.3. Select the destination you want to route to from the list that appears.4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then confirm the destination by pressing“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on thepop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV, U.S. 48 Contiguous States,Alaska And Hawaii)Subscriptions can be purchased online at Mopar Owner Connect. If you need help pushthe ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care (or dial1-877-320-5755 ).NOTE:You can set up a SiriusXM Guardian Payment Account online, or by calling SiriusXMGuardian Care. To set it up online, login to moparownerconnect.com, go to Edit Profile,then SiriusXM Guardian Account, to set up and manage your Payment Account.Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian AccountSelling Your VehicleWhen you sell your vehicle, we recommend that you remove your SiriusXM GuardianAccount information from the vehicle. You can do this on the Mopar Owner Connectwebsite moparownerconnect.com. Removing your account information cancels yoursubscription and makes your vehicle factory-ready for a new owner/subscriber.For additional information on SiriusXM Guardian, visit DriveUconnect.com or call1-877-320-5769Built-In FeaturesWARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.ELECTRONICS101
WARNING!• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some SiriusXM Guardianservices, including SOS Call and ASSIST, will NOT work without an operable LTE(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you may not have SOS Call service ifneeded. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer servicethe SOS Call system immediately.• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on theinstrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the airbag system. If theAir Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working properlyand the SOS Call system may not send a signal to a SOS Call operator if an air bagis deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealerservice your vehicle immediately.• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerousroad conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a SOS Call operator.All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.• The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not addaftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may preventyour vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interferencethat can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g.,two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical systemor modify the antennas on your vehicle.• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDINGDURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps, and SiriusXMGuardian services, among others, will not operate.NOTE:Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.1. ASSIST Call (8.4/8.4 NAV) — The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST push button,and the touchscreen contains a SiriusXM Guardian App, which will automaticallyconnect the vehicle occupants to one of these predefined destinations for immediatesupport:ELECTRONICS102
•Roadside Assistance Call —Ifyouget a flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll beconnected to someone who can helpanytime. Additional fees may apply.Additional information in this sec-tion.•Uconnect Care — In vehicle supportfor Uconnect Apps and Features.•SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehiclesupport for SiriusXM Guardian ser-vices.•Vehicle Care — Total support for yourFCA US LLC vehicle.2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) —The rearview mirror contains a SOS Callbutton that, when pressed, may place acall from your vehicle to a SiriusXMGuardian Care operator, who can con-nect you to emergency service operators, to request help from local police, fire orambulance personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed, you will have 7 seconds tostop the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call button again or press the “Cancel” buttonshown on the touchscreen. After 7 seconds has passed, the SOS call will be placed andonly the SOS Call operator can cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror will turngreen once a connection to a SOS Call operator has been made. The green LED lightwill turn off once the SOS Call is terminated. Have an authorized dealer service thevehicle if the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On equipped vehicles, thisfeature requires a functioning electrical system and an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G(data) network connection to function properly. If a connection is made between a SOSCall operator and your vehicle, you understand and agree that SOS Call operators willstay on the line, even after you connect with emergency services. The Emergencyservices operator may, like any other emergency call, record conversations andsounds in and near your vehicle upon connection.3. Roadside Assistance (If Equipped) — If your vehicle is equipped with this feature andhas an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection, you may be able toconnect with Roadside Assistance by pushing the "ASSIST" button on the rearviewmirror. You will be presented with Assist Care options. Make a selection by pressing theprompts displayed on the radio. If Roadside Assistance is provided to your vehicle, youagree to be responsible for any additional roadside assistance service costs that youmay incur. In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to you, we may record andmonitor your conversations with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care, SiriusXMGuardian Care, or Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are initiated through theSiriusXM Guardian services in your vehicle, your device, or via a landline device, andSOS Call Button And ASSIST1 — ASSIST Button2 — SOS Call ButtonELECTRONICS103
may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordancewith regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.4. Security Alarm Notification — The Security Alarm Notification feature notifies you viaemail or text (SMS) message when the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm systemhas been set-off. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have beentriggered, one of which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see thedetails of the Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below. When you register, SecurityAlarm Notification is automatically set to send you an email at the email address youprovide should the alarm go off. You may also opt to have a text message sent to yourdevice.5. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law enforcementimmediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this report has been filed, SiriusXMGuardian Care can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent will askfor the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as yourvehicle has an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection, theSiriusXM Guardian Care Agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and work withlaw enforcement to help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and must be registered with SiriusXM Guardianwith an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.NOTE:Your vehicle must have a working electrical system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXMGuardian services to operate.SiriusXM Guardian Remote FeaturesIf you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the SiriusXM Guardian Appallows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine or activate your horn andlights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote start and yourvehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 34G (data) network connection).Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. Youcan download the App from Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) orGoogle Play Store (Android). Visit UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device iscompatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine if your device iscompatible.U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on yourvehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request to yourvehicle in one of two ways:1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the engine willshut off automatically.ELECTRONICS104
• You can also send a command to turn-off an engine that has been remote started.• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factory-installedRemote Start system. To utilize this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App isdownloaded, login with your user name and password.To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your username and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN toconfirm the request. Press the “remote start” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App toremotely start the vehicle.You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) messageevery time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect moparownerconnect.comand click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.Remote Door Lock/Unlock — This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the door onyour vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any distance. You can send a request toyour vehicle in one of three ways:1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your username and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN toconfirm the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on your SiriusXM Guardian App to lockthe doors, and press the “open lock” icon to unlock the driver’s door.You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email or text (SMS) messageevery time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect moparownerconnect.comand click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.Remote Horn And Lights — It’s easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy parkingarea by activating the horn and lights. It may also help if you need to draw attention to yourvehicle for any reason. You can send a request to your vehicle in one of three ways:1. Using the SiriusXM Guardian App from a compatible device.2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on the phone.To use this feature after the SiriusXM Guardian App is downloaded, login using your username and password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN toconfirm the request. You can set-up notifications for your account to receive an email ortext (SMS) message every time a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connectmoparownerconnect.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifi-cations.ELECTRONICS105
Vehicle Finder — If you can’t find where you parked your vehicle you can use this featureto help you find it. Use the SiriusXM Guardian mobile app to reference the GPS locationof your vehicle, and your own current GPS location. From there, you can route a path fromyour location to your vehicle’s location, or activate its security alarm to better find itlocation. You can only do this from the SiriusXM Guardian App.Send & Go— If you want to send a navigation route from your mobile device, to yourvehicle’s navigation system, you can do so using this feature of the SiriusXM GuardianApp. You can even use the app to call the destination once a route is mapped. You can onlydo this from the SiriusXM Guardian App.ELECTRONICS106
UCONNECT 5.0WARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in thisvehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in anaccident involving serious injury or death.CAUTION!Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to thescreen.Uconnect 5.01 — RADIO Mode Button2 — MEDIA Mode Button3 — Uconnect PHONE Button4 — COMPASS Button5 — CLIMATE Button6 — MORE ButtonELECTRONICS107
Clock SettingTo start the clock setting procedure, perform the following:1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate. Next press the “Settings” button on thetouchscreen and then press the “Clock and Date” button on the touchscreen.2. Press the “Set Time” button on the touchscreen.3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust the hours or minutes, then select the “AM”or “PM” button on the touchscreen. You can also select 12hr or 24hr format bypressing the desired button on the touchscreen.4. Once the time is set, press the “Done” button on the touchscreen to exit the timescreen.NOTE:In the Clock Setting Menu, you can also select “Display Clock”, which turns the clockdisplay in the status bar on or off.Equalizer, Balance And Fade1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.2. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.3. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to get to the Audiomenu.4. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings.Equalizer• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.Use the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desiredsettings. Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.Balance/Fade• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from thespeakers. Use the “arrow” button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from thefront and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button on thetouchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the “Done”button on the touchscreen when finished.Speed Adjustable• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to select between OFF,1, 2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.Press the “Done” button on the touchscreen when finished.Loudness• Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. Whenthis feature is activated it improves sound quality at lower volumes.ELECTRONICS108
Radio OperationSeek Up/Down Buttons• Press the up or down button to seek through radio stations in AM, FM or SXM bands.• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.Store Radio Presets ManuallyThe Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the Radio modes. There are four visiblepresets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing the “All” button on the touchscreen on theradio home screen will display all of the preset stations for that mode.To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:1. Tune to the desired station.2. Press and hold the desired preset button on the touchscreen for more that two secondsor until you hear a confirmation beep.Uconnect 5.0 Radio Screen1 — Radio Station Presets2 — Show All Presets3 — Seek Up4 — Audio Settings5 — Station Info6 — Direct Tune7 — Radio Band8 — Seek DownELECTRONICS109
SiriusXM Premier Over 160 channelsGet every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all thepremium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, everyMLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extrachannels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push the RADIO button on the faceplate and then theSXM button on the touchscreen.SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trial includedwith the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of yourtrial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-currentrates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and 1-888-539-7474for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete termsat www.siriusxm.com for U.S. residents and www.siriusxm.ca for Canadian residents. Allfees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those atleast 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is alsoavailable in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is availablethroughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. © 2016 Sirius XM Radio Inc.Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If EquippedTo select a specific audio source, push theMEDIA button on the faceplate. To allowmusic to play from your device through thevehicle’s speakers, press the “Source” but-ton then select one of the following modes:USB/iPod• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either in-serting a USB Jump Drive or iPod cableinto the USB port or by pushing theMEDIA button on the faceplate locatedleft of the display.Audio Jack (AUX)• The AUX allows a device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged into the radioand utilize the vehicle’s audio system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify thesource and play through the vehicle speakers.• The functions of the device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons onthe radio. The volume may be controlled using the radio or device.SD CardUconnect Media Hub1 — AUX Port2 — USB Port3 — SD Card SlotELECTRONICS110
• Play songs stored on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot.• Song playback can be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel Audio Controls toplay, skip to the next or previous track, browse, and list the contents.Bluetooth• If using a Bluetooth-equipped device, you may also be able to stream music to yourvehicle's sound system.UCONNECT 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPSIntroducing UconnectStart using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the keyVoice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 system.Key Features:• 5” touchscreen• Three buttons on either side of the displayGet Started1. U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibilityand to find device pairing instructions.2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noisethat may impact recognition.Uconnect 5.0ELECTRONICS111
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The micro-phone is positioned on the headliner and aimed at the driver.4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phonebutton, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phonebutton and saying a Voice Command from current category.All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on yoursteering wheel.Basic Voice CommandsThe basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnectsystem.Push the VR button . After the beep, say:•Cancel to stop a current voice session•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands•Repeat to listen to the system prompts againUconnect VR/Phone Buttons1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text2 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions3 — Push To End CallELECTRONICS112
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cuesappear on the touchscreen.RadioUse your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you wouldlike to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)Push the VR button . After the beep, say:•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, pushthe VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.Uconnect 5.0 Visual CuesELECTRONICS113
MediaUconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices.Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and followthe prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.•Change source to Bluetooth•Change source to iPod•Change source to USB•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Playgenre ClassicalTIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your iPod orUSB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song andgenre information is displayed.Uconnect 5.0 RadioELECTRONICS114
PhoneMaking and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-book button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready.U.S. residents can visit UconnectPhone.com to check device and feature compatibilityand to find device pairing instructions.Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…•Call John Smith•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” thenpronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact hasmultiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”Uconnect 5.0 MediaELECTRONICS115
Voice Text ReplyUconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and sayListen. (Must have compatible device paired to Uconnect system.)1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the Phone button . After thebeep, say: Reply.2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-definedmessages and follow the system prompts.TIP: Your device must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com forU.S. residents. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSESYes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.No. Start without me. I’ll be late.Okay. Where are you? I will be <number> minuteslate.Call me. Are you there yet?I’ll call you later. I need directions. See you in <number> min-utes.I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now.I’m lost. Thanks.Uconnect 5.0 PhoneELECTRONICS116
Additional Information© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar, Mopar Owner Connect and Uconnect areregistered trademarks of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM andall related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelpburst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.For Uconnect system support, visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week)Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241. Please have your UconnectSecurity PIN ready when you call.UCONNECT 8.4/8.4 NAVUconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV At A GlanceWARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio ScreenELECTRONICS117
CAUTION!Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to thescreen.Setting The Time• Model 8.4 NAV synchronizes time automatically via GPS, so it should not require anytime adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually, follow the instructions belowfor Model 8.4 NAV.• For Model 8.4, turn the unit on, and then press the time display at the top of the screen.Press “Yes.”• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen, press the “Settings” button on thetouchscreen. In the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, thencheck or uncheck this option.• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.• If these features are not available, uncheck the Sync Time box.• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the Clock Setting screen.Background Themes• Screen background themes are selectable from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d liketo set a theme, follow the instructions below.• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.Audio Settings• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen toadjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the “X” located at the top right.Balance/Fade• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between thefront speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or pressand drag the Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.Equalizer• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level barfor each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus 9,is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.Speed Adjusted Volume• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen to activate the SpeedELECTRONICS118
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing thevolume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume withvariation to vehicle speed.Personalized Menu BarThe Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for yourconvenience. Simply follow these steps:1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the mainmenu bar.The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be anactive App/shortcut.NOTE:This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK.RadioUconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main MenuELECTRONICS119
WARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardianservices, and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXMGuardian services when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.Selecting Radio Stations• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM) button on the touchscreen.Seek Up/Seek Down• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two secondsto seek through radio stations.Uconnect 8.4 NAV Radio1 — Radio Station Presets2 — Toggle Between Presets3 — Status Bar4 — View Small Navigation Map5 — HD Radio6 — Main Category Bar7 — Audio Settings8 — Seek Up9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station10 — Seek Down11 — Browse And Manage Presets12 — Radio BandsELECTRONICS120
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds tobypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable station oncethe arrow button on the touchscreen is released.Direct Tune• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the “Tune” button on the screen, andentering the desired station number.Store Radio Presets ManuallyYour radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM).They are shown at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset stations per band,press the arrow button on the touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle betweenthe two sets of six presets.To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps below:1. Tune to the desired station.2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than twoseconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.HD Radio — If Equipped• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 8.4 NAV) operates similar to conventional radioexcept it allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided with a clear sound that enhances thelistening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as song title or artist.SiriusXM Premier Over 160 ChannelsGet every channel available on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place.Hear commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk and entertainment. Get all thepremium programming, including Howard Stern, every NFL game, Oprah Radio, everyMLB and NHL game, every NASCAR race, Martha Stewart and more. And get 20+ extrachannels, including SiriusXM Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial free music,news, talk, comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.• To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, press the “SXM” button on the touchscreen on themain Radio screen.The following describes features that are available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radiomode:Seek Up/Seek Down• Press the Seek arrow buttons on the touchscreen for less than two seconds to seekthrough channels in SXM mode.• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds tobypass channels without stopping. The radio will stop at the next listenable channelonce the arrow button on the touchscreen is released.Direct TuneELECTRONICS121
• Tune directly to a SXM channel by pressing the “Tune” button on the touchscreen onthe screen, and entering the desired station number.Tune Start• The Tune Start feature begins playing a song from the beginning when you tune to yourfavorite preset SXM channel. Tune Start can be enabled or disabled through theSiriusXM setup page.Jump• Automatically tells you when Traffic & Weather for a favorite city is available, and givesyou the option to switch to that channel. Press “Jump” to activate the feature. Afterlistening to Traffic and Weather, press “Jump” again to return to the previous channel.Fav• Activates the favorites menu. You can add up to 50 favorite artists or songs. Just press“Add Fav Artist” or “Add Fav Song” while the song is playing. You will then be alertedany time one of these songs, or works by these artists, is playing on other SiriusXMchannels.Album Art• When arriving at a station, the Channel Art will be displayed to the left of the stationinformation. After 5 seconds the Channel Art will be replaced with the Album Art (ifavailable).SiriusXM Parental Controls• You can skip or hide certain channels from view if you do not want access to them.Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then the “Settings” button on thetouchscreen, next press the “Sirius Setup” button on the touchscreen, then selectChannel Skip. Press the box check-mark next to the channel you want skipped. Theywill not show up in normal usage.• SiriusXM also offers the option to permanently block selected channels. Call(1-888-601-6297 for U.S. customers, 1-877-438-9677 for Canadian customers)and request the Family-Friendly Package.BrowseLets you browse the SiriusXM channel listing or Genre listing. Favorites, Game Zone,Weather and Jump settings also provide a way to browse the SiriusXM channel list.Browse Sub-MenuSub-Menu DescriptionAll Shows the channel listing.Genre Provides a list of all genres, and lets you jump to a channel within the selectedgenre.Presets Lets you scroll the list of Preset satellite channels. Press the channel, or pressEnter on the Tune knob, to go to that channel. Press the trash can icon todelete a preset. Your presets are also shown at the top of the main SatelliteRadio screen.ELECTRONICS122
Favorites Lets you manage artists and songs in the Favorites list and configure AlertSettings to let you know when favorite songs or artists are playing on otherchannels. Also, view a list of channels airing any of your Favorites.Game Zone Provides alerts when your favorite sports teams are starting a game which isbeing aired on other SiriusXM channels, or when their game score is an-nounced. You can select and manage your Teams list here, and configurealerts.Jump Lets you select your favorite cities for Traffic & Weather information, which isused by the Jump feature on the main satellite radio screen.ReplayLets you replay up to 44 minutes of the content of the current SiriusXM channel.Replay Op-tionOption DescriptionPlay/Pause Press to Pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume playback.Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold torewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point.FastForward/FWForwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, FastForward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound.Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which yourcontent lags the Live channel.Live Resumes playback of Live content at any time while replaying rewoundcontent.• SiriusXM services require subscriptions, sold separately after the 12-month trialincluded with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at theend of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill atthen-current rates until you call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349 for U.S. residents and1-888-539-7474 for Canadian residents to cancel. See SiriusXM Customer Agreementfor complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (U.S. residents) or siriusxm.ca (Canadianresidents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service isavailable only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. OurSirius satellite service is also available in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internetradio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI.©2016 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarksof Sirius XM Radio Inc.Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If EquippedELECTRONICS123
There are many ways to play music fromMP3 players or USB devices through yourvehicle's sound system. Press your Mediabutton on the touchscreen to begin.Audio Jack (AUX)• The AUX allows a device to be pluggedinto the radio and utilize the vehicle’ssound system, using a 3.5 mm audiocable, to amplify the source and playthrough the vehicle speakers.• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touch-screen will change the mode to auxiliarydevice if the audio jack is connected,allowing the music from your device tobe heard through the vehicle's speakers.To activate the AUX, plug in the audiojack.• The functions of the device are con-trolled using the device buttons. Thevolume may be controlled using the ra-dio or device.• To route the audio cable out of the center console, use the access cut out in the frontof the console.USB Port• Connect your compatible device using a USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memorysticks with audio files can also be used. Audio from the device can be played on thevehicles sound system while providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)information on the radio display.• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio orSteering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous track, browse, andlist the contents.• The battery charges when plugged into the USB port (if supported by the specificdevice).• To route the USB cable out of the center console, use the access cut out.Uconnect Media Hub1 — USB Port One2 — Audio/AUX Jack3 — USB Port TwoELECTRONICS124
NOTE:When connecting your device for the first time, the system may take several minutes toread your music, depending on the number of files. For example, the system will takeapproximately five minutes for every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during thereading process, the Shuffle and Browse functions will be disabled. This process isneeded to ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it isconnected. After the first time, the reading process of your device will take considerablyless time unless changes are made or new songs are added to the playlist.Bluetooth Streaming Audio• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device may alsobe able to stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must beBluetooth-compatible and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone for pairinginstructions). You can access the music from your connected Bluetooth device bypressing the Bluetooth button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.Media ControlsThe controls are accessed by pressing the desired button on the touchscreen and choosingMedia Controls1 — Repeat Music Track2 — Music Track And Time3 — Shuffle Music Tracks4 — Music Track Information5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue ToBe Played6 — Browse Music By7 — Music SourceELECTRONICS125
between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.NOTE:Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is firstconnected or inserted into the system.Android AutoAndroid Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system, and your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), orhigher, powered smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to project your smartphoneand a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automaticallybrings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just whenthey are needed. Android Auto can be used with Android’s best-in-class speech technol-ogy, the steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate, and theradio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps. To use Android Auto follow thefollowing procedure:1. Download the Android Auto app from the Google Play store on your Android poweredsmartphone.2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in yourvehicle. If the Android Auto app was not downloaded, the first time you plug yourdevice in, the app will begin to download.NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable, as aftermarket cables may not work.3. Once the device is connected and rec-ognized, the “Phone” icon on the per-sonalized menu bar will automaticallychange to the Android Auto Icon. If itdoes not appear automatically, refer to“Android Auto And Apple CarPlay TipsAnd Tricks” in “Uconnect 8.4/8.4NAV”for the procedure to enable the feature“AutoShow”. Android Auto shouldlaunch automatically, but if not, touchthe Android Auto icon on the touch-screen to launch it.Once Android Auto is up and running on your Uconnect radio, the following features canbe utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:• Google Maps for navigation• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart, etc. for music• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication• Many more appsAndroid AutoELECTRONICS126
NOTE:To use Android Auto make sure you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data andcellular coverage is shown in the top bar of the radio screen.MapsTo use your Google Maps for navigation onyour Uconnect system, launch AndroidAuto, and push and hold the VR button onthe steering wheel to use voice commandsto set your desired destination. You can alsopress the microphone icon, within AndroidAuto, to activate Android Auto VR. GoogleMaps can also be accessed by pressing the“Maps” button inside of Android Auto.NOTE:If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the native Uconnect VR will prompt youand any navigation command said will launch the native Uconnect navigation system.While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:• Navigation• Live traffic information• Lane guidanceNOTE:If you are using the native Uconnect navi-gation system, and you try and start a newroute using the Android Auto system, viavoice or any other method, a pop-up willappear asking if you would like to switchfrom Uconnect navigation to smartphonenavigation. A pop-up will also appear, ask-ing if you’d like to switch, if an Android Autonavigation is currently in use and you at-tempt to launch a native Uconnect route.Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigationtype to the newly used method of navigation and a route will be planned for the newdestination. If “No” is selected the navigation type will remain unchanged.For further information refer to www.android.com/auto/.MusicAndroid Auto allows you to access and stream your favorite music with apps like GooglePlay Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can streamendless music on the road. Android Auto comes with a 30–day free trial subscription toGoogle Play Music, which provides access to millions of songs, ad-free.Android Auto Data and Cellular CoverageAndroid Auto MapsELECTRONICS127
NOTE:Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up on your smartphone prior to usingAndroid Auto, for them to work with Android Auto.NOTE:To see the metadata for the music playingthrough Android Auto, select the UconnectSystem’s media screen.For further information refer towww.android.com/auto/.CommunicationWith Android Auto connected, press andhold the VR button on the steering wheel toactivate voice recognition specific to theAndroid Auto system. This will allow you to send and reply to text messages, haveincoming text messages read out loud, and place and receive hands-free calls.AppsThe Android Auto App will display all thecompatible apps that are available fordownload and use with the Android AutoSystem, every time it is launched. You musthave the compatible app downloaded, andyou must be signed in to the app for it towork with the Android Auto system. Refer tohttps://play.google.com/store/apps/collection/promotion_3001303_android_auto_allto see the latest list of available apps forAndroid Auto.Apple CarPlayApple Car is a feature of your UconnectSystem, and iPhone 5, or higher, that usesyour smartphone’s data plan to allow you toproject your iPhone and a number of itsapps onto the touchscreen radio display.Apple CarPlay lets you use your iPhone inthe car in a way that allows you to stayfocused on the road. Apple CarPlay allowsyou to use Siri through your vehicle’s voicerecognition system, the vehicle’s knobs and controls, along with and touchscreen tocontrol many iPhone apps. To use Apple CarPlay, make sure your iPhone is unlocked, Siriis enabled in the settings, then use the following procedure:1. Connect your Apple iPhone to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.Android Auto MusicAndroid Auto PhoneAndroid Auto ContactELECTRONICS128
NOTE:Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable, as aftermarket cables may not work.2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the personalizedmenu bar will automatically change to the Apple CarPlay Icon. If it does not appearautomatically, refer to “Android Auto And Apple CarPlay Tips And Tricks” in “Uconnect8.4/8.4NAV” for the procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”. Apple CarPlayshould launch automatically, but if not, touch the Apple CarPlay icon on the touch-screen to launch it.3. Your iPhone’s screen will be locked outfor the entire time it is connected to theUconnect System, and you can beginusing CarPlay via voice or touchscreen.Once Apple CarPlay is up and running onyour Uconnect radio, the following featurescan be utilized using your iPhone’s dataplan:• Phone• Music• Messages• Maps• Many more appsNOTE:To use Apple CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned on, and that you are in an areawith cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radioscreen.PhoneWith Apple CarPlay, press and hold the VRbutton on the steering wheel to activate aSiri voice recognition session. You can alsopress and hold the “Home” button, withinApple CarPlay, to begin an Apple CarPlayVR session. This will allow you to send andreceive calls as you would normally usingSiri on your iPhone.Apple CarPlayApple CarPlay Data and Cellular CoverageELECTRONICS129
NOTE:Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the steering wheel will launch a native VRsession, not a Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay.MusicApple CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes, andBeats music. Using your smartphone’s data plan, you can also stream “Apple approved”Internet Radio, and audio books.NOTE:Access to some files may be limited in Apple CarPlay, due to Apple’s lockout features.MessagesJust like Phone, Apple CarPlay allows you touse Siri to send or reply to text messages.Siri can also read incoming text messages,but driver’s will not be able to read mes-sages, as everything is done via voice.MapsTo use your Apple Maps for navigation onyour Uconnect system, launch Apple Car-Play, and push and hold the VR button onthe steering wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.NOTE:• If the VR button is not held, and is onlypushed, the native Uconnect VR willprompt you and any navigation com-mand said will launch the nativeUconnect navigation system.• If you are using the native Uconnectnavigation system, and you try and starta new route using the Apple CarPlaysystem, via voice or any other method, apop-up will appear asking if you would like to switch from Uconnect navigation toiPhone navigation. A pop-up will also appear, asking if you’d like to switch, if an AppleCarPlay navigation is currently in use and you attempt to launch a native Uconnectroute. Selecting “Yes” will switch the navigation type to the newly used method ofnavigation and a route will be planned for the new destination. If “No” is selected thenavigation type will remain unchanged.Apple CarPlay MusicELECTRONICS130
AppsTo use a compatible app with the AppleCarPlay system, you must have the compat-ible app downloaded, and you must besigned in to the app. Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ to see the lat-est list of available apps for Apple CarPlay.Navigation• The information in the section below isonly applicable if you have the 8.4 NAVsystem or the Navigation has been acti-vated on your 8.4 system.• If you have a Uconnect 8.4 system your radio is “Navigation-Ready,” and can beequipped with Navigation at an extra cost. Please see your dealer for details.Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigationsystem.Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower right area of the screen.2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons onthe touchscreen.Navigation Pop-upELECTRONICS131
Finding Points Of Interest• From the main Navigation menu, press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen,then press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.• Select a category and then a subcategory, if necessary.• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.Finding A Place By Spelling The Name• From the Main Navigation Menu press the “Where to?” button on the touchscreen,press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”button on the touchscreen.• Enter the name of your destination.• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.One-Step Voice Destination EntryUconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation1 — Search For A Destination In AllCategories2 — Find A Destination3 — View Map4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destina-tion5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destina-tion6 — Navigation Settings7 — Emergency8 — InformationRepeat Route Guid-ance PromptELECTRONICS132
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command button on the steering wheel, wait forthe beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."NOTE:Destination entry is not available while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can alsouse Voice Commands to enter an address while moving. Refer to “Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAVVoice Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for further information.Setting Your Home Location• Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the Navigationsystem and the Main Navigation menu.• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.• You may enter your address directly, use your current location as your home address, orchoose from recently found locations.• To delete your Home location (or other saved locations) so you can save a new Homelocation, press the “Home” button on the touchscreen, and in the “GO!” screen pressthe “Options” button on the touchscreen. In the Options menu press the “Clear Home”button on the touchscreen. Set a new Home location by following the previousinstructions.Home• A Home location must be saved in the system. From the Main Navigation menu, pressthe “Home” button on the touchscreen.ELECTRONICS133
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If you depart from the original route, yourroute is recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you travel on major roadways.Adding A Stop• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation menu.• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop. Whenanother location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, addas the first destination or add as the last destination.• Press the desired selection and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.Taking A Detour• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.Uconnect 8.4 NAV Map1 — Distance To Next Turn2 — Next Turn Street3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival4 — Zoom In And Out5 — Your Location On The Map6 — Navigation Main Menu7 — Current Street Location8 — Navigation Routing OptionsELECTRONICS134
NOTE:If the route you are currently taking is the only reasonable option, the device may notcalculate a detour. For more information, see your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supple-ment.SiriusXM Traffic (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system withthe ability to see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determineaverage traffic speed and estimate travel time along your route. Since the service isintegrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic can help drivers pick thefastest route based on traffic conditions.• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services,cameras and road sensors.• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.• View conditions for points along your route and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4 NAV & US Market Only)In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the best sports, entertainment, talk, andcommercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in conjunctionwith compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of usefulinformation into your vehicle and right to your fingertips.•Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in your area and route to the station ofyour choice.•Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to thetheater of your choice.•Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well as weekly schedules.•Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps tocurrent and 5-day forecast.SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutesafter you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the background.You can access the information whenever you like, with no waiting.To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.ELECTRONICS135
NOTE:SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold separately after the five (5) year trialsubscription included with your vehicle purchase.SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States.UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPSIntroducing UconnectStart using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the keyVoice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAVsystem.If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. Ifnot, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system.Get StartedAll you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on yoursteering wheel.1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and tofind phone pairing instructions.2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noisethat may impact recognition.3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The micro-phone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phonebutton, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phonebutton and saying a Voice Command from current category.ELECTRONICS136
1. Uconnect Phone Button , Push to initiate, answer, or end a phone call, send orreceive a text.2. Uconnect Voice Recognition Button .a. Short Press: Push and release the VR button to begin Radio, Climate, Navigation,and other embedded functions. After you hear the single beep, say a command.b. Long Press: Push and hold continuously for a few milliseconds, then release theVR button for Siri functions. After you hear the familiar Siri "double beep," say acommand.3. Phone Hang Up Button.Basic Voice CommandsThe basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnectsystem.Push the VR button . After the beep, say…•Cancel to stop a current voice session•Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands•Repeat to listen to the system prompts againNotice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cuesappear on the touchscreen.Uconnect VR And Phone ButtonsELECTRONICS137
RadioUse your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you wouldlike to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)Push the VR button . After the beep, say…•Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM•Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, pushthe VR button and say “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands.Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAVELECTRONICS138
MediaUconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voiceoperation is only available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD playeroptional and not available on all vehicles.)Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and followthe prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.•Change source to Bluetooth•Change source to AUX•Change source to USB•Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Playgenre ClassicalTIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your AUX orUSB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song andgenre information is displayed.Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV RadioELECTRONICS139
PhoneMaking and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-book button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. CheckUconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands…•Call John Smith•Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts•Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)•Call back (call previous incoming phone number)TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,”then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact hasmultiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV MediaELECTRONICS140
Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV)Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortablewhile you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:•Set driver temperature to 70 degrees•Set passenger temperature to 70 degreesTIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature ofyour vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel ifequipped.Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV PhoneELECTRONICS141
Navigation (8.4/8.4 NAV)The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive whenyou know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on theUconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.)1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say:• For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”• For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive AuburnHills, Michigan.”2. Then follow the system prompts.TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find nearestcoffee shop.”SiriusXM GuardianWARNING!Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and ASSIST will NOT workwithout an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV ClimateELECTRONICS142
NOTE:Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXMGuardian services in the next section of this guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started.NOTE:SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continen-tal United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage isavailable; see coverage map for details.SOS CallTheft Alarm NotificationRemote Door Lock/UnlockSend & GoVehicle FinderStolen Vehicle AssistanceRemote Vehicle Start**Remote Horn & LightsRoadside Assistance CallVehicle Health Reports**Vehicle Health Alert**Performance Pages Plus****If vehicle is equipped.RegisterTo unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in your vehicle, you first need to registerwith SiriusXM Guardian.1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.ELECTRONICS143
2. Press the “SiriusXM Guardian Care”button on the touchscreen.3. A helpful SiriusXM Guardian Care Agentwill register your vehicle and handle allof the details.Signing up is easy! Simply follow the stepsabove. Or, press the “Apps ” button onthe touchscreen to “Register By Web” tocomplete the process using your smart-phone or computer.For further information please visitwww.driveuconnect.comVehicle Health Report/AlertYour vehicle will send you a monthly emailreport, which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stayon top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle HealthAlerts when it detects issues with its key systems that need your attention. For furtherinformation go to the your Owner Site website (owners.dodge.com, orowners.chrysler.com).Mobile AppYou’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite musicin your car.To use the SiriusXM Guardian App:• Download the SiriusXM Guardian App toyour mobile device.• Press the Info button on the navigationbar at the bottom of the app for VehicleInfo.• Press the Remote button on the naviga-tion bar at the bottom of the app toLock/Unlock, Remote Start, and activateyour horn and lights remotely.• Press the Location button on the naviga-tion bar at the bottom of the app to bringup a map to loacte your vehicle or send alocation to your vehicle’s navigation sys-tem.• Press the Settings button in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settingsand access the Assist Call Centers.Rearview MirrorMobile AppELECTRONICS144
NOTE:For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV)Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the5-dayweather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth ofinformation right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system.)Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:•Show fuel prices•Show 5 - day weather forecastELECTRONICS145
•Show extended weatherTIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.Apple CarPlay (8.4/8.4 NAV)Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voicerecognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and anumber of its apps onto your Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5,or higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable, andpress the new CarPlay icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar tobegin Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press andhold the “Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes naturalvoice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:• Phone• Music• Messages• Maps• Additional AppsSiriusXM Travel LinkELECTRONICS146
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s ManualSupplement for further information.Android Auto (8.4/8.4 NAV)Android Auto allows you to use your voice tointeract with Android’s best-in-class speechtechnology through your vehicle’s voice rec-ognition system, and use your smartphone’sdata plan to project your Android poweredsmartphone and a number of its apps ontoyour Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV touchscreen.Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), orhigher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and pressthe new Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to beginAndroid Auto. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the“Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which recognizesnatural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:• Maps• Music• Phone• Text Messages• Additional AppsRefer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.General InformationThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada's licence-exempt RSSs. Opera-tion is subject to the following two condi-tions:1. This device may not cause harmful in-terference.2. This device must accept any interfer-ence that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.NOTE:• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate the device.• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that IndustryCanada technical specifications were met.Apple CarPlayAndroid AutoELECTRONICS147
Additional Information© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarksand Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark ofGoogle Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM RadioInc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.Uconnect System Support:• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day7 days a week)• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or1-800-387-9983 (French)Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ETSat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ETSun., ClosedUconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241 Please have your UconnectSecurity PIN ready when you call.UCONNECT PHONEUconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)ELECTRONICS148
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place and receive hands-free mobile phonecalls. Drivers can also place mobile phone calls using their voice or by using the buttonson the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — theglobal standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each otherwirelessly.If the Uconnect Phone Button exists on your steering wheel, you then have theUconnect Phone features.NOTE:• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.Uconnect 5.0 Phone Menu1 — Call/Redial/Hold2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life5 — Mute Microphone6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect Sys-tem7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu8 — Text Messaging9 — Direct Dial Pad10 — Recent Call Log11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains9-1-1)12 — End CallELECTRONICS149
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however somemobile phones/devices may not be equipped with all of the required features to utilizeall of the Uconnect system features.• For Uconnect Customer Care:• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400.Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect SystemMobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between acellular phone and the Uconnect system.NOTE:• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must determine if your mobile phone andsoftware are compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit UconnectPhone.comfor complete mobile phone compatibility information.• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the vehicle is in motion.• A maximum of 10 mobile phones can be paired to the Uconnect system.Start Pairing Procedure On The RadioUconnect 5.0:1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ONposition.2. Press the “Phone” button.3. Select “Settings.”4. Select “Paired Phones.”5. Select “Add device.”• Uconnect Phone will display an “Inprogress” screen while the system isconnecting.Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV:1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ONposition.2. Press the “Phone” button in the MenuBar on the touchscreen.3. Select “Settings.”4. Select “Paired Phones.”5. Select “Add device.”• Uconnect Phone will display an “Inprogress” screen while the system isconnecting.Uconnect 5.0Uconnect 8.4 & 8.4 NAVELECTRONICS150
Pair Your iPhone:To search for available devices on yourBluetooth enabled iPhone:1. Press the Settings button.2. Select Bluetooth.• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-abled. Once enabled, the mobilephone will begin to search forBluetooth connections.3. When your mobile phone finds theUconnect system, select “Uconnect”.Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:1. When prompted on the mobile phone,accept the connection request fromUconnect Phone.NOTE:Some mobile phones will require you toenter the PIN number.Select The iPhone's Priority LevelWhen the pairing process has successfullycompleted, the system will prompt you tochoose whether or not this is your favoritemobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will makethis mobile phone the highest priority. Thismobile phone will take precedence overother paired mobile phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect systemautomatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetoothaudio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen, and theUconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.Pair Your Android Device:Bluetooth On/Uconnect DevicePairing RequestELECTRONICS151
To search for available devices on yourBluetooth enabled Android Device:1. Push the Menu button.2. Select Settings.3. Select Connections.4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-abled. Once enabled, the mobilephone will begin to search forBluetooth connections.5. Once your mobile phone finds theUconnect system, select “Uconnect”.• You may be prompted by your mobile phone to download the phonebook, check “DoNot Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is so you can makecalls by saying the name of your contact.Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mo-bile phone matches the passkey shownon the Uconnect system then accept theBluetooth pairing request.NOTE:Some mobile phones require the PIN to beentered manually, enter the PIN numbershown on the Uconnect screen.Select The Android Mobile Phone's PriorityLevelWhen the pairing process has successfullycompleted, the system will prompt you tochoose whether or not this is your favoritemobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will makethis mobile phone the highest priority. Thismobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within range and willconnect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobilephone and/or one Bluetooth audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at atime. If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio deviceBluetooth screen, and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the Bluetooth device.You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press the Uconnect “Phone” button onyour steering wheel to begin.Uconnect DevicePairing RequestELECTRONICS152
NOTE:Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairingand for a list of compatible phones.Common Phone Commands (Examples)• “Call John Smith”• “Call John Smith mobile”• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”• “Redial”Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the Phone main screen to mute and unmutethe call.Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen totransfer an on-going call between handset and vehicle.PhonebookThe Uconnect system will automatically sync your phonebook from your paired phone, ifthis feature is supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are updated each time thatthe phone is connected. If your phone book entries do not appear, check the settings onyour phone. Some phones require you to enable this feature manually.• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing canonly be done on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen,then the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen.Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites areshown at the top of the main phone screen.Voice Command Tips• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater systemaccuracy.• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” forexample.• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to theentire list. When you hear the command that you need, push the button on thesteering wheel, wait for the beep and say your command.Changing The Volume• Start a dialogue by pushing the Phone button , then say a command. Forexample, "Help".• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable levelwhile the Uconnect system is speaking.ELECTRONICS153
NOTE:The volume setting for Uconnect is different than the audio system.NOTE:To access help, push the Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel and say"help." Push the Uconnect Phone Pickup button or the VR button and say"cancel" to cancel the help session.Using Do Not DisturbWith Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowingyou to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there isa counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you wereusing Do Not Disturb.Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when decliningan incoming call and send it to voicemail.Automatic reply messages can be:• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters.While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a secondcall without being interrupted by incoming calls.NOTE:• Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones.• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting BluetoothMAP.Incoming Text MessagesAfter pairing your Uconnect system with a Bluetooth enabled mobile device with theMessage Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can announce a new incoming textmessage and read it to you over the vehicle’s audio system.NOTE:Only incoming text messages received during the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.To enable incoming text messaging:iPhone1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.2. Select Bluetooth.• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile phone is paired to the Uconnectsystem.ELECTRONICS154
3. Select located under DEVICES next to Uconnect.4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.Android Devices1. Push the Menu button on the mobilephone.2. Select Settings.3. Select Connections.4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.• A pop up will appear asking you toaccept a request for permission toconnect to your messages. Select“Don’t ask again” and press OK.NOTE:All incoming text messages received duringthe current ignition cycle will be deletedfrom the Uconnect system when the igni-tion is turned to the OFF position.Helpful Tips And Common Questions ToImprove Bluetooth Performance WithYour Uconnect SystemMobile Phone won’t reconnect to systemafter pairing:• Set mobile phone to auto-connect ortrusted device in mobile phoneBluetooth settings (Blackberry devices).• Perform a factory reset on your mobilephone. Refer to your mobile phonemanufacturer or cellular provider for in-structions.• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hardreboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close all applications thatmay be operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — seeyour mobile phone’s owner manual).• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and Uconnect system; usually found in phone’sBluetooth connection settings.Enable iPhone Incoming Text MessagesEnable Android Device Incoming Text Mes-sagesELECTRONICS155
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobilephone.• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the default is 0000.Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the “phonebook download” request on yourmobile phone.• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to theUconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV system phonebook.• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the Uconnect5.0 system phonebook.Can’t make a conference call:• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual for further information.Making calls while connected to AUX:• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while connected to Bluetooth will disableHands-Free Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile phone is plugged into the AUXjack.STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLSThe steering wheel audio controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel.Left Switch• Push the switch up or down to search forthe next listenable station.• Push the button in the center to selectthe next preset station.Right Switch• Push the switch up or down to increaseor decrease the volume.• Push the button in the center to changemodes AM/FM/SAT.INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAYThe instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in theinstrument cluster. Pushing the controls on the left side of the steering wheel allows thedriver to select vehicle information and Personal Settings. Refer to “ProgrammableFeatures” in this guide for further information.Steering Wheel Audio ControlsELECTRONICS156
• Push the up arrow button to scrollupward through the main menus(Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver As-sist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes-sages, Screen Setup) and sub menus.• Push the down arrow button to scrolldownward through the main menus andsub menus.• Push the right arrow button to scrollforward to the next menu or sub menu.• Push the left arrow button to scrollback to a previous menu or sub menu.• Push the OK button to access/select theinformation screens, the submenuscreens of a main menu item, or to selecta personal setting in the setup menu. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds toreset displayed/selected features that can be reset.Compass CalibrationThis compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually.When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic, and the cluster will displaydashes (- -) until the compass is calibrated.You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in anarea free from large metal or metallic objects) until the dashes (- -) displayed in the clusterturn off. The compass will now function normally.PERFORMANCE FEATURESOverview Of Performance FeaturesWARNING!ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility andassume all risks related to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in thisvehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in anaccident involving serious injury or death.The Performance Features include the following:0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer• Best• Last• Current• Reaction TimerInstrument Cluster Display ControlsELECTRONICS157
0-100 MPH (0-161 km/h) Timer• Best• Last• Current• Reaction Timer1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer• Best• Last• Current• Reaction Timer1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer• Best• Last• Current• Reaction TimerBraking Distance• Distance• From SpeedCurrent G-ForcesPeak G-ForcesLap TimerLap History• Will list the last 5 laps with the best lap highlighted in green.Top SpeedThe following describes each feature and its operation:0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 MPH (100 km/h) in less then10 seconds.• To clear the vehicle's best, last, and current 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) time, push andhold the OK button for two seconds.ELECTRONICS158
0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h)When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 15 seconds.• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word“READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) in lessthen 15 seconds.• To clear the vehicle's best, last and current 0 to 100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) time, pushand hold the OK button for two seconds.1/8 Mile (200 Meters)When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within15 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” willflash when conditions are met for the event to begin.• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile (200 meters) in less then15 seconds.• To clear the vehicle's best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, push and hold the OK button forfive seconds.1/4 Mile (400 Meters)When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within25 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (400 meters).• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h). The word “READY” willflash when conditions are met for the event to begin.• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4 mile (400 meters) in less then25 seconds.• To clear the vehicle's best 1/4 mile (400 meters) run, push and hold the OK button fortwo seconds.Braking DistanceWhen selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance, and the speed at whichthe brake pedal was pushed.• This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 MPH(48 km/h).• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.• The word “READY” will display when conditions are met for the event to begin.• The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place.• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before thevehicle comes to a complete stop.• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the current and last run values.ELECTRONICS159
Current G-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) thatdisplays the directions of the forces.Peak G-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and two longitu-dinal).• When a force greater than zero is measured, the display will update the value as itclimbs. As the G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force values.Lap TimerWhen selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with theprevious Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).• Pushing the OK button will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.• When the OK button is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will stop and thetime will be reset to 0:00.00.• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “current” timer will reset to 0:00.0 whenignition is placed in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON position (or will rollover at 59:59.99 if ever possible).• Each time the driver pushes the OK button for a Lap that current time populates, theLast time and also populates the 1st (top) space on the Timer History page the currenttime resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button.• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away from this page.Lap HistoryWhen selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the time thatis the best time from the Timer Page.• Each time the driver pushes the OK button (while on the Lap Timer page) the currentLap Time populates the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.• Color will indicate the time that is the best time from the Timer Page.• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are on.• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.Top SpeedWhen selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset:• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every time that speed is exceeded thatnumber is stored here unless/until the driver resets the screen.• Latching over ignition cycles.ELECTRONICS160
• Units will change with the global change in units.PROGRAMMABLE FEATURESInstrument Cluster DisplayThe instrument cluster display can be used to view or change the following settings. Pushthe up arrow button or the down arrow button to scroll through the main menus,then push the right arrow button to scroll through the submenus of each menu item.Push the left arrow button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu. Push the OKbutton to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that canbe reset.• Speedometer • Audio• Vehicle Info • Messages• Driver Assist — If Equipped • Screen Setup• Fuel Economy • Speed Warning — If Equipped• Trip • Diagnostic — If EquippedUconnect Customer Programmable FeaturesThe Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings suchas Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, RestoreSettings, Clear Personal Data, System Information, and Compass Settings (5.0 RadioOnly) through buttons on the touchscreen.NOTE:If equipped with the Super Track Pak option please refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement”within your Owners Information Kit for further descriptions of these modes.• Press the “Controls” button located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the“Settings” button on the touchscreen to access the Settings screen. When making aselection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press andrelease the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showingthat setting has been selected. The following feature settings are available:• Display • Engine Off Options• Units • Audio• Voice • Phone/Bluetooth• Clock • SiriusXM Setup• Safety & Driving Assistance • Restore Settings• Lights • Clear Personal Data• Doors & Locks • System Information• Auto-On Comfort • Compass (5.0 Radio Only)ELECTRONICS161
Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” found within “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” located in your Owner's Manual on the DVD for furtherinformation.UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENERUniversal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such asgarage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLinkunit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console or sunvisor designate thethree different HomeLink channels.The HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.Before You Begin ProgrammingHomeLinkEnsure that your vehicle is parked outsideof the garage before you begin program-ming.For efficient programming and accuratetransmission of the radio-frequency signal,it is recommended that a new battery beplaced in the hand-held transmitter of thedevice that is being programmed to theHomeLink system.To erase the channels, place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position, then push andhold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds or until the redindicator flashes.HomeLink ButtonsELECTRONICS162
NOTE:Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the firsttime. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or,on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.Programming A Rolling CodeNOTE:For programming Garage Door Openers that were manufactured after 1995. These GarageDoor Openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where thehanging antenna is attached to the Garage Door Opener. It is NOT the button that isnormally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary bymanufacturer.1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position.2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLinkbutton you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold thehand-held transmitter button.4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicatorwill flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changesfrom slow to rapid.5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to thegarage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”button.NOTE:You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has beenpushed.6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding thebutton for two seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and activates,programming is complete.NOTE:If the device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to completethe training.7. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remainingbutton. DO NOT erase the channels.ELECTRONICS163
Programming A Non-Rolling CodeNOTE:For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.1. Place the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLinkbutton you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold thehand-held transmitter button.4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink indicatorwill flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changesfrom slow to rapid.5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. Ifthe indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door(or device) should activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.6. To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remainingbutton. DO NOT erase the channels.Using HomeLinkTo operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occurfor the programmed device (e.g., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entrydoor lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also beused at any time.WARNING!• Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming theuniversal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people or pets are in the pathof the door or gate.• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming thetransceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which isodorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can causeyou and others to be severely injured or killed.POWER OUTLETELECTRONICS164
There are two 12 Volt electrical outlets onthis vehicle.The front 12 Volt power outlet has poweravailable only when the ignition is placed inthe ACC or RUN position.The center console outlet is powered di-rectly from the battery (power available atall times). Items plugged into this outletmay discharge the battery and/or preventthe engine from starting.NOTE:• Do not exceed the maximum power of160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-ceeded, the fuse protecting the systemwill need to be replaced.• Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not insert any other objectin the power outlet as this will damagethe outlet and blow the fuse. Improperuse of the power outlet can cause dam-age not covered by your New VehicleLimited Warranty.Front Power OutletCenter Console Power OutletPower Outlet Fuses1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Cigar Lighter Integrated Center Stack / Dual USB ChargeOnly Ports2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console / Media HubELECTRONICS165
UTILITY166
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)3.6L Automatic 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)5.7L Automatic 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speedsTrailer towing with the 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine is not recommended.UTILITY167
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel DriveRecreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOTALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) ison a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.CAUTION!Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis-sion and/or transfer case damage. Such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.UTILITY168
DRIVE MODESYour SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode feature. This feature gives the drivercontrol over the systems in the vehicle which affect its performance, enabling the driverto tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:NOTE:Refer to “Drive Modes” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manualon the DVD for further descriptions of these modes.Launch Mode — If EquippedThis vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system that is designed to allow the driverto achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a form oftraction control that manages tire slip while launching the vehicle. This feature isintended for use during race events on a closed course where consistent quarter mile(400m) and 0 to 60 (100km/h) times are desired. The system is not intended tocompensate for lack of driver experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of thisfeature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions may results in excess wheel slipoutside this systems control resulting in an aborted launch.NOTE:Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles (804 km) of engine break-in.Preconditions:• Launch control should not be used on public roads. Always check track conditions andthe surrounding area.• Launch Control should only be used when the engine and transmission are at operatingtemperature.• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved road surfaces only. Use on slipperyor loose surfaces may cause damage to vehicle components and is not recommended.Launch Control is available when the following procedure is followed:1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch bank.NOTE:Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or pressing the “Apps” button on thetouchscreen are two other options to access launch control features. Please refer to“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” within your Owner’sManual on the DVD or the “Drive Modes Supplement” for further information.2. Push the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow youto adjust your launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.3. Push the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the touchscreen.4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in “Drive” or “AutoStick” position.SRT169
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. Theengine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM Set-up” screen.NOTE:Messages will appear in the instrument cluster to inform the driver if one or more of theabove conditions have not been met.8. When conditions 4 through 7 have been met, the instrument cluster display will read“Launch Ready Release Brake”.9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which pointthe ESC system will return to its current ESC mode.Launch control will abort before launch completion, display “Launch Aborted” in thecluster under any the following conditions:• The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC system continues in ESC Full ON.• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer moving in a straight line.• The “ESC OFF” button is pushed to change the system to another mode.NOTE:After launch control has been aborted, ESC will return to its current ESC mode.CAUTION!Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are spinning and do not have traction.Damage to the transmission may occur.SRT PERFORMANCE FEATURESSRT Instrument Cluster DisplaySRT170
The instrument cluster display can be usedto view or change the following SRT Perfor-mance Features. Push the up or downarrow button until SRT Performancedisplays in the instrument cluster display,then push the right arrow button. Followthe prompts to view and set your desiredsettings. Push the left arrow button toscroll back to a previous menu or sub menu.SRT Performance Sub Menu Items•0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer •Current G-Force•0-100 MPH (0–161 km/h) Timer •Peak G-Force•1/8 Mile •Lap Timer•1/4 Mile •Lap History•Braking Distance •Top Speed0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to60 MPH (0 to 100 km/h) within 10 seconds.0–100 MPH (0–161 km/h)• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to100 MPH (0 to 161 km/h) within 20 seconds.1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile• When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4mile) within 30 seconds and the vehicle's speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4 mile).Braking Distance• When selected, this screen displays the vehicle's braking distance and the speed atwhich the brake pedal was depressed.Current G-Force• When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force (lateral and longitudinal) alongwith a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces.Peak G-Force• When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force values (two lateral and twolongitudinal).SRT Instrument Cluster Display ControlsSRT171
Lap Timer• When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer always at 0:00.00 with theprevious Best and Last time data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset)Lap History• When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and will color highlight the timethat is the best time from the Timer Page.Top Speed• When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since last reset.UCONNECT PERFORMANCE PAGESTo access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then pressthe “Performance Pages” button on the touchscreen.The Performance Pages includes the following menus:•Home •Gauges 2•Timers •G – Force•Gauges 1 •EngineHomeWhen Home is selected, the following options will be available:• A series of six images which can be selected by the user.• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll through vehicle images.• A short-cut to the Drive Modes feature.TimersWhen the Timers Page is selected you will be able to select from following “Tickets”:Current• Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time” summary of performance timers.Last• Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run of performance timers.Best• Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run of performance timers,except for braking data.Save• Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run. Any saved run over 10, willoverwrite the last saved run for Uconnect System storage.SRT172
Gauges 1When selected, this screen displays the following values:• Coolant Temperature• Oil Pressure• Oil Temperature• Battery Voltage• Trans Oil TempGauges 2When selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.2L:• Boost Pressure• Air Fuel Ratio• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature• Intake Air TemperatureWhen selected, this screen displays the following values for the 6.4L:• Battery Voltage• Intake Air Temperature• Transmission TemperatureG-ForceWhen selected, this screen displays the following values:• Lateral G-Force Left and Right• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right• Vehicle Speed• Steering Wheel AngleEngineWhen selected, this screen displays the following values:• Vehicle Speed• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts• Instantaneous Torque• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)• Gear• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)SRT173
SUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES• This vehicle may be equipped with wheels and tires to enhance traction in both wet anddry conditions.• Summer tires are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.• Summer tires have significantly reduced grip in temperatures below 50°F (10°C).• Use Summer tires only in sets of four.NOTE:Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol onthe sidewall of the tire.WARNING!Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose control, resulting insevere injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of lossof vehicle control.SRT174
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCEDial toll-free 1-800-521-2779 for U.S. Residents or 1-800-363-4869 for CanadianResidents.• Provide your name, vehicle identification number, license plate number, and yourlocation, including the telephone number from which you are calling.• Briefly describe the nature of the problem and answer a few simple questions.• You will be given the name of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. Ifyou feel you are in an “unsafe situation”, please let us know. With your consent, we willcontact local police or safety authorities.WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTSIMPORTANT: The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together witha dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications areindicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/oralternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised toread carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event ofa failure indication.All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The system check menu may appeardifferent based upon equipment options and current vehicle status.This guide illustrates and describes the operation of warning and indicator telltales thatare either standard or optional based on the vehicle build. FCA reserves the right to makechanges in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improvements to itsproducts without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on productspreviously manufactured.Instrument Cluster Warning Lights– Low Fuel Warning LightThis warning light indicates when the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L).This light will turn on and a single chime will sound.– Battery Charge Warning LightThis light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If the battery chargewarning light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with thecharging system.We recommend you do not continue driving if the battery charge warning light is on. Havethe vehicle serviced immediately.– Oil Pressure Warning LightThis light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop thevehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this lightturns on.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES175
We recommend you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have thevehicle serviced immediately.– Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) LightThis light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).If the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving we recommend youcontact the nearest authorized dealer and have the vehicle serviced immediately.– Air Bag Warning LightIf the light is not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving have the vehicleserviced by an authorized dealer immediately.– Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indicator LightThis light informs you of a problem with the system.If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle theignition when the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector is placed in thePARK position; the light should turn off.If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.However, see an authorized dealer immediately. If the light is flashing when the engine isrunning, immediate service is required, and you may experience reduced performance, anelevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.– Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) LightEach tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.IF THE LIGHT SWITCHES ON AND A MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED INDICATING A LOWTIRE PRESSURE, ADJUST THE AIR PRESSURE IN THE LOW TIRE TO THE AIRPRESSURE SHOWN ON THE VEHICLE PLACARD OR TIRE INFLATION PRESSURELABEL LOCATED ON THE DRIVER'S DOOR.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES176
NOTE:AFTER INFLATION, THE VEHICLE MAY NEED TO BE DRIVEN FOR 20 MINUTESABOVE 15 MPH (24 KM/H) BEFORE THE FLASHING LIGHT WILL TURN OFF.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunctionindicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressureas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.NOTE:Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperaturechange. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in theWinter. Example: If garage temperature is 68°F (20°C), and the outside temperature is32°F (0°C), then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.CAUTION!The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMSpressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacementequipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels cancause sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if yourvehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.– Engine Temperature Warning LightThis light warns of an overheated engine condition.If the light turns on or flashes continuously while driving, safely pull over and stop thevehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL andidle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine offimmediately.We recommend that you do not operate the vehicle or engine damage will occur. Have thevehicle serviced immediately.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES177
WARNING!A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned bysteam or boiling coolant.– Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator LightThe “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switchis turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESCIndicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has beendetected in the ESC system.If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been drivenseveral miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h), we recommend youdrive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.– Brake Warning LightThis light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brakeapplication. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied,that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the brake system mastercylinder reservoir.If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level isat the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulicsystem malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by theAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, thelight will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to thebrake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedalpulsation may be felt during each stop.The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to aportion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicatedby the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the mastercylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause iscorrected.Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped withElectronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the BrakeWarning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS systemis required.Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch fromthe OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximatelytwo seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brakefault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorizeddealer.The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in theON/RUN position.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES178
NOTE:This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree ofbrake application. In the case of the brake pads of the vehicle were worn out, brakewarning light will be illuminated.WARNING!Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system mayhave failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have thevehicle checked immediately.– Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)Certain conditions, such as a poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after enginestart. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical drivingcycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and not require towing.If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious conditions may exist that could leadto immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. We recommend you donot operate the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced immediately.Instrument Cluster Indicator Lights– Turn Signal IndicatorThe arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated.A tone will chime, and an instrument cluster display message will appear if either turnsignal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES179
NOTE:If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.– High Beam IndicatorIndicates that headlights are on high beam.– Front Fog Light IndicatorThis indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.– Vehicle Security LightThis light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarmis arming. The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set. Thesecurity light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on.– Electronic Speed Control SetIndicates that the Electronic Speed Control has been set.– Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON IndicatorIf your vehicle is equipped with adaptive cruise control, the controls operate exactly thesame as the normal (fixed speed) cruise control with one difference. You can set aspecified distance you would like to maintain between you and the vehicle in front of you.If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerationautomatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of thevehicle ahead.If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.Refer to “Speed Control” in “Operating Your Vehicle” for further information on AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC) ON operation and proper use.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES180
NOTE:Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruisecontrol while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety systemand not designed to prevent collisions.– Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator LightThe ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be usedon any public roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF.To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC” switch for five seconds while thevehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the“ESC OFF” Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the "ESC OFF" message will display in thevehicle cluster (left of the odometer). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the “ESC”switch.– Door Open IndicatorThis indicator will illuminate when a door(s) is left open and not fully closed.Oil Change DueYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil ChangeDue” message will display for 5 seconds along with a single chime to indicate the nextscheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personaldriving style.Resetting The Light After ServicingVehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle theignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once toreturn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.NOTE:• If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicatorsystem did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.• Resetting the oil life can also be done within the "Oil Life" menu under “Vehicle Info.”WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES181
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATSIn any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by takingthe appropriate action.• On the highways — slow down.• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do notincrease the engine idle speed.NOTE:There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the enginecooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floorand the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to theradiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.WARNING!You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from yourradiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hooduntil the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure capwhen the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.CAUTION!Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gaugereads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditionerturned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains onthe “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for service.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES182
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGINGWARNING!• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pullfar enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack orchanging the wheel.• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack andfall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehiclethat is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service centerwhere it can be raised on a lift.• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should notbe used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firmlevel surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.Jack Location/Spare Tire StowageThe jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access cover in the trunk. Follow thesesteps to access the jack and spare tire.NOTE:The spare tire must be removed in order to access the jack.1. Open the trunk.2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.Spare Tire/Tools Location1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire2 — Spare Tire3 — Pull StrapWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES183
4. Remove the spare tire.5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.6. Remove the wheel chocks, jack and lugwrench assembly from under the sparetire. Turn the jack screw to the left toloosen the lug wrench, and remove thewrench from the jack assembly.WARNING!A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.Spare Tire FastenerJack FastenerWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES184
Preparations For Jacking1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible.Avoid icy or slippery areas.WARNING!Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pullfar enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing thewheel.2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.3. Set the parking brake.4. Place the gear selector into PARK.5. Turn off the ignition.6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking positionusing the provided wheel chocks. For example, if changing the right front tire, chockthe left rear wheel. Place both chocks under the tire.Wheel ChocksWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES185
NOTE:Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.Jacking And Changing A TireWARNING!Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damageto your vehicle:• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possiblebefore raising the vehicle.• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK.• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raisedvehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tirechange.• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowedwith the valve stem facing the ground.CAUTION!Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicatedin the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.1. Remove the spare tire, jack, wheel chocks, and lug wrench.NOTE:The spare tire must be used for the rear wheel(s) only. For a flat front tire, move the reartire to the front and use the spare tire on the rear.2. If equipped with aluminum wheelswhere the center cap covers the lugnuts, use the lug wrench to pry thecenter cap off carefully before raisingthe vehicle.Warning LabelSpare Tire LabelWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES186
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to loosen, but not remove, the lug nutson the wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while thewheel is still on the ground.4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screwclockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.NOTE:If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide the jack on its side and rotate it up intoposition.5. Raise the vehicle just enough to removethe flat tire and install the spare tire.WARNING!Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slipoff the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.Rear Jacking LocationFront Jacking LocationWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES187
7. Mount the spare tire.CAUTION!Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle couldbe damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.NOTE:• For vehicles so equipped, do not at-tempt to install a center cap or wheelcover on the compact spare.• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in “Starting andOperating” in your Owner's Manual onthe DVD for additional warnings, cau-tions, and information about the sparetire, its use, and operation.8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shapedend of the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.WARNING!To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully untilthe vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personalinjury.9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of thehandle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut hasbeen tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m).If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench byyour authorized dealer or service station.NOTE:For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).11. Stow the wheel chocks, jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base of the jack facesthe front of the vehicle before tightening down the fastener.WARNING!A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the placesprovided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.Installing Compact SpareWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES188
Road Tire Installation1. Mount the road tire on the axle.2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.Lightly tighten the lug nuts.WARNING!To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully untilthe vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personalinjury.3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handlefor increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has beentightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 130 ft-lbs (176 N·m). If indoubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by yourauthorized dealer or service station.NOTE:For the SRT model the correct wheel nut tightness is 111 ft lbs (150 N·m).5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure thatall lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPEDDescriptionSmall punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kitcan be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).Tire Service Kit StorageThe Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.Tire Service Kit Components And OperationWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES189
Using The Mode Select Knob And HosesYour Tire Service Kit is equipped with thefollowing symbols to indicate the air or seal-ant mode.•Selecting Air ModePush in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turnto this position for air pump operation only.Use the Black Air Pump Hose (7) whenselecting this mode.•Selecting Sealant ModePush in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turnto this position to inject the Tire Service KitSealant and to inflate the tire. Use theSealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when select-ing this mode.•Using The Power ButtonPush and release the Power Button (4) onceto turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push andrelease the Power Button (4) again to turnOff the Tire Service Kit.•Using The Deflation ButtonPush the Deflation Button (2) to reduce theair pressure in the tire if it becomes over -inflated.Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) prior to theexpiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assureoptimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section(F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire application use and need tobe replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at youroriginal equipment vehicle dealer.• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth willremove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealantdries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debrisbefore connecting the Tire Service Kit.Tire Service Kit Components1 — Sealant Bottle2 — Deflation Button3 — Pressure Gauge4 — Power Button5 — Mode Select Knob6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)8 — Power Plug (located on the bottomside of the Tire Service Kit)WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES190
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes withtwo needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the airpump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only theAir Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Air Mode wheninflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealantis only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread ofyour tire.• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.WARNING!• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull farenough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:• If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.• If the tire has any sidewall damage.• If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.• If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.• If the wheel has any damage.• If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel.• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger theoccupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided.Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,your passengers, and others around you.• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair,eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, orabsorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flushimmediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Changeclothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. Ifswallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water.Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that isnear to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to reach thevalve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the bestpositioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running theair pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position beforeproceeding.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES191
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission)and place the ignition in the OFF position.4. Set the parking brake.(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position.2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of thehose.3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire.4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of theSealant Hose (6) onto the valve stem.5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.NOTE:Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire:• Always start the engine before turning on the Tire Service Kit.NOTE:Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the gear selec-tor in NEUTRAL.• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the SealantBottle (1) through the Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.NOTE:Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire.If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10seconds through the Sealant Hose(6):1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose(6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect theSealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in theSealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on the TireService Kit.2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle oranother vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is running before turning on the TireService Kit.3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES192
NOTE:If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispensefrom the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose (6):1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typicallytakes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), thePressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) willdecrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure whenthe Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1)is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicatedon the tire pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar (recommended pressure).Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call forassistance.NOTE:If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure tothe recommended inflation pressure before continuing.If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressurewithin 15 minutes:1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service Kit.2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle (1) and place thesticker on the instrument panel.3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap onthe fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storagelocation. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”CAUTION!• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should behandled carefully.• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can resultin sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also resultin sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause perma-nent damage to the kit.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES193
(D) Drive Vehicle:Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do notexceed 55 mph (90 km/h).WARNING!Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repairedor replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tireis repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that areserious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.(E) After Driving:Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop to Use Tire Service Kit” beforecontinuing.1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air Mode position.2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose(7) onto the valve stem.4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge (3).If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call forassistance.If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pressureindicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door opening.NOTE:If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure tothe recommended inflation pressure before continuing.2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stemand unplug from 12 Volt outlet.3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle.4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at anauthorized dealer or tire service center.5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument panel after the tire has beenrepaired.6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) assembly at your authorizeddealer as soon as possible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES194
NOTE:When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tirehas been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealantbottle.3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove thebottle and dispose of it accordingly.4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing.5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) alignswith the hose slot in the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. Anaudible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place.6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) andreturn the hose to its storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.BATTERY LOCATIONThe battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are locatedon the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURESIf your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-started using a set of jumpercables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in thissection carefully.NOTE:When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions and precautions.WARNING!Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode andcause personal injury.CAUTION!Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a systemvoltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator orelectrical system may occur.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES195
Preparations For Jump-StartThe battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. Remote battery posts are locatedon the right side of the engine compartment for jump-starting.NOTE:The remote battery posts are viewed by standing on the right side of the vehicle lookingover the fender.WARNING!• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can startanytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make aninadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogengas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from thebattery.1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and place theignition in the OFF position.2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumpercables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.Remote Battery Posts1 — Positive Battery Post2 — Negative Battery PostWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES196
WARNING!Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connectionand personal injury could result.Jump-Starting ProcedureWARNING!Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or propertydamage due to battery explosion.CAUTION!Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of thebooster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.Connecting The Jumper Cables1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of thevehicle with the discharged battery.2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the boosterbattery.4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-)post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.WARNING!Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. Theresulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result inpersonal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metalparts.5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a fewminutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:Disconnecting The Jumper Cables1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative (-) postof the vehicle with the discharged battery.2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) postof the booster battery.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES197
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of thebooster battery.4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive(+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery andcharging system inspected at your authorized dealer.CAUTION!Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’sbattery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently todegrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.MANUAL PARK RELEASE—8SPEEDTRANSMISSIONWARNING!Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake, before activating theManual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to rollaway if it is not secured by the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to seriousinjury or death for those in or around the vehicle.In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK(such as a dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:1. Firmly apply the parking brake.2. Remove the console storage bin.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES198
3. Remove the plastic cover under the binby using the slot provided to access theManual Park Release lever.4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,fish the tether strap up through theopening in the console base.5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in thecenter of the lever, and disengage thelever locking tab by pushing it to theright.6. While holding the locking tab in thedisengaged position, pull the tetherstrap to rotate the lever up and rearward,until it locks in place in the verticalposition. The vehicle is now out of PARKand can be moved. Release the parkingbrake only when the vehicle is securelyconnected to a tow vehicle.To Reset The Manual Park Release:1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever,on the rear side) rearward (away from thelever) to unlatch the lever.2. Rotate the Manual Park Release leverforward and down, to its original posi-tion, until the locking tab snaps intoplace to secure the lever.3. Pull up gently on the tether strap toconfirm that the lever is locked in itsstowed position.4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of theconsole. Reinstall the Manual Park Re-lease cover and the console storage bin.TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLEThis section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercialtowing service.Towing Condition Wheels OFF TheGround RWD MODELS AWD MODELSConsole Storage BinManual Park Release1 — Tether Strap2 — Locking TabWHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES199
Flat Tow NONEIf transmission isoperable:• Transmission inNEUTRAL• 30 mph (48 km/h)max speed• 30 miles (48 km)max distanceNOT ALLOWEDWheel Lift Or DollyTowFrontNOT RECOMMENDED(but, if used, samelimitations as above)NOT ALLOWEDRear NOT RECOM-MENDEDNOT RECOM-MENDED, but, ifused:• Ignition in ON/RUN position• Transmission inNEUTRAL (NOT inPark)Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHODRefer to your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.FREEING A STUCK VEHICLEIf your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rockingmotion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels.Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, shift back and forth betweenDRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount ofaccelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning thewheels or racing the engine.NOTE:Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.CAUTION!Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating andfailure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least oneminute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating andreduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES200
NOTE:Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information. Oncethe vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.WARNING!Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds maycause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injuresomeone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longerthan 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not letanyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.CAUTION!• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do notspin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmissionoverheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “OccupantRestraints” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)function.EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploymentor hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed.Please refer to “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags” in “OccupantRestraints” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES201
OPENING THE HOOD1. Pull the hood release lever located onthe instrument panel, below the head-light switch.2. Raise the hood and locate the safetycatch lever, in the middle of the hoodopening.3. Push the safety catch lever to the leftwhile lifting the hood at the same time.WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fullylatched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure tofollow this warning could result in serious injury or death.Hood ReleaseMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE202
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE203
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover5. Engine Oil FillMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE204
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap7. Air Cleaner Filter8. Engine Oil Dipstick9. Washer Fluid ReservoirMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE205
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover5. Engine Oil FillMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE206
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap7. Air Cleaner Filter8. Engine Oil Dipstick9. Washer Fluid ReservoirMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE207
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal2. Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap3. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)4. Engine Oil Fill5. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access CoverMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE208
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap7. Air Filter Cleaner8. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir9. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal10. Engine Oil Dipstick11. Washer Fluid ReservoirMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE209
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L1. Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal2. Power Distribution Center (Fuses)3. Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal4. Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover5. Engine Oil FillMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE210
6. Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap7. Air Cleaner Filter8. Engine Oil Dipstick9. Washer Fluid ReservoirMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE211
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRTFluid Capacities — 3.6LU.S. MetricFuel (Approximate)87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol forFlex Fuel (E-85) Engine 18.5 Gallons 69.9 LitersEngine Oil With FilterSAE 5W-20, API Certified 6 Quarts 5.6 LitersCooling System*MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent 10 Quarts 9.5 Liters* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.Fluid Capacities — 5.7LU.S. MetricFuel (Approximate)89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable,0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 69.9 LitersEngine Oil With FilterSAE 5W-20, API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 LitersCooling System*MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent – without SevereDuty II Cooling System14.5 Quarts 13.9 LitersMOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent – with SevereDuty II Cooling System15 Quarts 14.3 Liters* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.FLUID CAPACITIES — SRTFluid Capacities — SRT 6.2LU.S. MetricFuel (Approximate)91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 LitersEngine Oil With FilterSAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 LitersCooling System *Engine: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT cool-ant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 MileFormula or equivalent15.2 Quarts 14.4 LitersMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE212
U.S. MetricIntercooler: MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OATcoolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent5 Quarts 4.7 Liters* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.Fluid Capacities — SRT 6.4LU.S. MetricFuel (Approximate)91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol 18.5 Gallons 70 LitersEngine Oil With FilterSAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified 7 Quarts 6.6 LitersCooling System *MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant con-forming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-mula or equivalent15.2 Quarts 14.4 Liters* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS — NON-SRTImportant InformationCAUTION!• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technol-ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and maydecrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant isdifferent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If anon-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in anemergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do notuse additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatiblewith the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is notrecommended.Engine — 3.6LMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE213
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology).Engine OilWe recommend you use API Certified SAE5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and ShellHelix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR EngineOil Filter.Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR SparkPlugs.Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) En-gine 87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.Engine — 5.7LComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT(Organic Additive Technology).Engine OilWe recommend you use API Certified SAE5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and ShellHelix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap forcorrect SAE grade.Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a MOPAR EngineOil Filter.Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR SparkPlugs.Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Ac-ceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission — 8-Speed Trans-missionUse only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Auto-matic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.Failure to use the correct fluid may affectthe function or performance of your trans-mission.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE214
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine PartBrake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 andSAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is notavailable, then DOT 4 is acceptable.Front Axle We recommend you use MOPAR SyntheticGear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR OD Syn-thetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR TransferCase Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.SRT FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTSImportant InformationCAUTION!• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technol-ogy (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and maydecrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant isdifferent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If anon-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in anemergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled withfresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon aspossible.• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do notuse additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatiblewith the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based enginecoolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is notrecommended.EngineComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine/Intercooler Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming toMS.90032.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE215
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartEngine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under alltypes of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recom-mends full synthetic engine oils.The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the re-quirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use inall operating temperatures.Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.Fuel Selection 91 Octane or higher, 0-15% Ethanol.ChassisComponent Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine PartAutomatic Transmission Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Auto-matic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Fail-ure to use the correct fluid may affect thefunction or performance of your transmission.Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 brakefluid. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available,then DOT 4 is acceptable.Hydraulic Power Steering Reservoir — IfEquippedWe recommend you use MOPAR HydraulicSystem Power Steering Fluid or equivalentmeeting the requirements of FCA MaterialStandard MS-10838.Rear Axle We recommend you use MOPAR LSD Syn-thetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).MAINTENANCE PROCEDURESFor information on the maintenance procedures for your vehicle, please refer to “Main-tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual or applicablesupplement on the DVD for further details.MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — NON-SRTYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil changeindicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE216
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequentshort-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usagewill influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed.Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,within the next 500 miles (805 km).The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and asingle chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing thescheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than yourauthorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide or“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’sManual on the DVD for further information.NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours ofengine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.Severe Duty All ModelsChange Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty andoff-road environment, or is operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:• Check engine oil level.• Check windshield washer fluid level.• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first signof irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and powersteering (if equipped) and fill as needed.• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.Maintenance ChartRequired Maintenance Intervals:Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenanceintervals.At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:•Change oil and filterMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE217
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:•Rotate the tiresRotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduledservice•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses•Inspect exhaust system•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditionsMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE218
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)20,00030,00040,00050,00060,00070,00080,00090,000100,000110,000120,000130,000140,000150,000Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Or Kilometers:32,00048,00064,00080,00096,000112,000128,000144,000160,000176,000192,000208,000224,000240,000Additional InspectionsInspect the CV joints. X X X X XInspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace ifnecessary. XXX X X X XInspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All WheelDrive Only). XXX X X X XInspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X XAdjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel discbrakes. XXX X X X XInspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only). X X XAdditional MaintenanceReplace engine air filter. X X X X XReplace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X XReplace spark plugs. ** XFlush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. XXInspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer case fluid; ifusing your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).XXChange the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All WheelDrive (AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for anyof the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer tow-ing.XX XMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE219
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)20,00030,00040,00050,00060,00070,00080,00090,000100,000110,000120,000130,000140,000150,000Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15Or Kilometers:32,00048,00064,00080,00096,000112,000128,000144,000160,000176,000192,000208,000224,000240,000Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.WARNING!• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling andperformance. This could cause an accident.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE220
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE221
MAINTENANCE RECORDOdometer Date Signature, Authorized Service Center20,000 Miles(32,000 km) or2 Years30,000 Miles(48,000 km) or3 Years40,000 Miles(64,000 km) or4 Years50,000 Miles(80,000 km) or5 Years60,000 Miles(96,000 km) or6 Years70,000 Miles(112,000 km) or7 Years80,000 Miles(128,000 km) or8 Years90,000 Miles(144,000 km) or9 Years100,000 Miles(160,000 km) or10 YearsMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE222
110,000 Miles(176,000 km) or11 Years120,000 Miles(192,000 km) or12 Years130,000 Miles(208,000 km) or13 Years140,000 Miles(224,000 km) or14 Years150,000 Miles(240,000 km) or15 YearsMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE223
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — SRTThe Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times ormileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle perfor-mance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severeoperating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection andservice should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.A “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a singlechime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate.This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).NOTE:• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change.Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, even if theoil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road/track usage for anextended period of time.• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km)or six months, whichever comes first.Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing thescheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than yourauthorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under“Instrument Cluster Warning Lights” in “What To Do In Emergencies” in this guide or“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’sManual on the DVD for further information.At Each Stop For Fuel• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Main-taining Your Vehicle” for further information.• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.Once A Month• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and power steering(6.2L Only), and add as needed.• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.At Each Oil ChangeMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE224
• Change the engine oil filter.• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.CAUTION!Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE225
SRT — Maintenance ChartMiles:6,00012,00018,00024,00030,00036,00042,00048,00054,00060,00066,00072,00078,00084,00090,00096,000102,000108,000114,000120,000126,000132,000138,000144,000150,000Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150Or Kilometers:10,00020,00030,00040,00050,00060,00070,00080,00090,000100,000110,000120,000130,000140,000150,000160,000170,000180,000190,000200,000210,000220,000230,000240,000250,000Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. X X XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXRotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregularwear, even if it occurs before scheduled mainte-nance.XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXIf using your vehicle for any of the following:dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the engineair cleaner filter; replace if necessary.XXXXXXXXXXXXInspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. X X X X X X X X X X X XInspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X X X X X XInspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X XAdjust the parking brake on vehicles equippedwith four wheel disc brakes. XXXXXChange the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle forany of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequenttrailer towing.XXXInspect the rear axle fluid. XXXXXXXXInspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and bootseals, for cracks or leaks and all parts for dam-age, wear, improper looseness or end play; re-place if necessary.XXXXXXXXXXXXReplace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X XReplace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X X X X X XMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE226
Miles:6,00012,00018,00024,00030,00036,00042,00048,00054,00060,00066,00072,00078,00084,00090,00096,000102,000108,000114,000120,000126,000132,000138,000144,000150,000Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150Or Kilometers:10,00020,00030,00040,00050,00060,00070,00080,00090,000100,000110,000120,000130,000140,000150,000160,000170,000180,000190,000200,000210,000220,000230,000240,000250,000Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary XReplace the spark plugs – 6.2L SuperchargedEngine ** XXReplace the spark plugs – 6.4L Engine ** XFlush and replace the engine coolant/intercoolerat 120 months if not done at 150,000 miles(240,000 km).XX** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.WARNING!• You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the rightequipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling andperformance. This could cause an accident.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE227
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE228
SRT MAINTENANCE RECORDOdometer Date Signature, Authorized Service Center6,000 Miles(10,000 km) or6 Months12,000 Miles(20,000 km) or12 Months18,000 Miles(30,000 km) or18 Months24,000 Miles(40,000 km) or24 Months30,000 Miles(50,000 km) or30 Months36,000 Miles(60,000 km) or36 Months42,000 Miles(70,000 km) or42 Months48,000 Miles(80,000 km) or48 Months54,000 Miles(90,000 km) or54 MonthsMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE229
60,000 Miles(100,000 km) or60 Months66,000 Miles(110,000 km) or66 Months72,000 Miles(120,000 km) or72 Months78,000 Miles(130,000 km) or78 MonthsMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE230
FUSESWARNING!• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with thesame amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higheramp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failureto use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the otherservices are switched off and/or disengaged.• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system),power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows,contact an authorized dealer.Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment. This modulecontains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the insideof the power distribution center cover.CAUTION!• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure thecover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to getinto the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correctamperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in adangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description1 – – Fuse – Spare2 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2LSupercharged)3 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #1 – IfEquipped / Radiator Fan (6.2LSupercharged) – If Equipped4 30 Amp Pink – Starter5 40 Amp Green – Electronic Stability Control6 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Stability Control7 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC #18 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run / ACC # 29 – 20 Amp Yellow All-Wheel Drive Module – IfEquippedMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE231
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description10 – 10 Amp Red Security – If Equipped / UnderHood Lamp – Police11 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns12 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch13 – – Fuse – Spare14 – – Fuse – Spare15 – 20 Amp Yellow Left HID – If Equipped16 – 20 Amp Yellow Right HID – If Equipped18 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan #2 – (Non 6.2LSupercharged)19 50 Amp Red – Electric Power Steering #2 – IfEquipped / Radiator Fan (6.2LSupercharged)20 30 Amp Pink – Wiper Motor21 30 Amp Pink20 Amp Blue –Police– Headlamp Washers – IfEquippedPolice Bat Feed #222 40 Amp Green/ 20 Amp Blue– Police– Engine Cooling Pump (6.2LSupercharged) / Police Bat Feed#323 20 Amp Blue – Police Bat Feed # 124 20 Amp Blue – Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed #328 – – Fuse – Spare29 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module(Challenger/Charger Police) /Electronic Shift Module (Chal-lenger)30 – – Fuse – Spare31 – 25 Amp Clear Engine Module32 – – Fuse – Spare33 – – Fuse – Spare34 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain #135 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain #236 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake Module37 – 10 Amp Red Engine Controller / Rad Fan Re-lays (Charger/300) / ElectricPower Steering Module(Charger/300) / Fuel Pump Re-lay (Charger/300) / 5–Speed38 – 10 Amp Red Airbag ModuleMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE232
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description39 – 10 Amp Red EPS (Challenger) / EHPS(Police)/AC Clutch Relay /Vacuum Pump Relay / FuelPump Relay (Challenger) / RadFan Relays (Challenger)48 – 10 Amp Red AWD Module/Front Axle Discon-nect – If Equipped49 – – Fuse – Spare50 – – Fuse – Spare51 – 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump52 – 5 Amp Tan Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped53 – – Fuse – SpareRear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire accesspanel. This center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions areprinted on the inside of the power distribution center cover.CAUTION!• When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure thecover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to getinto the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correctamperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in adangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, itindicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description2 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #13 – – Fuse – Spare4 60 Amp Yellow – Front PDC Feed #2530 Amp Pink20 Amp Blue – Po-lice– Sunroof/Dome Lamp– Police6 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #17 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lighting #28 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lighting9 40 Amp Green – Power Locks10 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door ControlModuleMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE233
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description11 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Con-trol Module12– 20 Amp Yellow Dual USB CenterConsole Rear/CigarLighter IP – IfEquipped15 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower16 20 Amp Blue – Left Spot Lamp –Police17 – – Fuse – Spare18 30 Amp Pink – Mod Network Inter-face – Police19 – – Fuse – Spare20 – – Fuse – Spare21 30 Amp Pink – Fuel Pump22 – 20 Amp Yellow –PoliceRight Spot Lamp –Police23 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door/DiagnosticPort24 – 10 Amp Red Integrated CenterStack25 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Moni-tor26– 15 Amp Blue Cygnus Transmis-sion Module(Charger/300)/Electronic ShiftModule (Charger/300)27 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier – IfEquipped31 – 25 Amp Breaker Power Seats – IfEquipped32 – 15 Amp Blue HVAC Module/Cluster33– 15 Amp Blue Ignition Switch/RFHub Module/Steering ColumnLock (300) – IfEquipped34 – 10 Amp Red Steering ColumnModule/Clock (300)35 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor36 – 15 Amp Blue Electronic ExhaustValve – If EquippedMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE234
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description37 – 20 Amp Yellow Radio38– 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet InsideArm Rest/ConsoleMedia Hub40 – – Fuse – Spare41 – – Fuse – Spare42 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defrost43– 20 Amp Yellow Comfort Seat AndSteering WheelModule (HeatedSteering Wheel/RRHeated Seats)44– 10 Amp Red Park Assist / BlindSpot / Rear ViewCamera45– 15 Amp Blue Cluster / RearviewMirror / Compass(Charger/300) / Hu-midity Sensor46 – – Fuse – Spare47– 10 Amp Red Adaptive FrontLighting / Auto HighBEAM / Day TimeRunning Lamps – IfEquipped48 – 20 Amp Yellow Active Suspension –(6.4L / 6.2L)49 – – Fuse – Spare50 – – Fuse – Spare51 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats– If Equipped52 – 10 Amp RedHeated Cupholders/Rear Heated SeatSwitches – IfEquipped53 – 10 Amp RedHVAC Module/InVehicle TemperatureSensor54 – – Fuse – Spare55 – – Fuse – Spare56 – – Fuse – Spare57 – – Fuse – Spare58 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module59 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals –PoliceMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE235
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description60 – – Fuse – Spare61 – – Fuse – Spare62 – – Fuse – Spare63 – – Fuse – Spare64 – 25 Amp Breaker Rear Windows(Charger/300)65 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module66 – – Fuse – Spare67 – 10 Amp RedRain and Light Sen-sor / Sunroof / In-side RR View Mirror/ Power Outlet Illu-mination (CenterConsole) / PoliceRun Acc Relay68 – 10 Amp RedDual USB PowerOutlet – R/A Sense(Charger/300) RearSunshade (Charger/300)69 – – Fuse – Spare70 – – Fuse – SpareTIRE SAFETY INFORMATIONTire MarkingsNOTE:• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing isbased on U.S. design standards.P-Metric tires have the letter “P” moldedinto the sidewall preceding the size des-ignation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.• European — Metric tire sizing is basedon European design standards. Tires de-signed to this standard have the tire sizemolded into the sidewall beginning withthe section width. The letter "P" is absentfrom this tire size designation. Example:215/65R15 96H.1 — U.S. DOTSafety StandardsCode (TIN)4 — MaximumLoad2 — Size Designa-tion5 — MaximumPressure3 — Service De-scription6 — Treadwear,Traction and Tem-perature GradesMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE236
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The sizedesignation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:LT235/85R16.• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary highpressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewallpreceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tirediameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.Tire Sizing ChartEXAMPLE:Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LTP= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, orLT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, orTorS= Temporary spare tire or31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or10.5 = Section width in inches (in)R= Construction code– "R" means radial construction, or– "D" means diagonal or bias construction15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)Service Description:95 = Load Index– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carryH= Speed Symbol– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a loadcorresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only beachieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicleloading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)Load Identification:Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates aStandard Load (SL) tire:•XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or•LL = Light load tire or•C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a speci-fied pressureMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE237
EXAMPLE:Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire in-flation pressure for this tireTire Identification Number (TIN)The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may onlybe on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code,located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side ofblack sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboardside, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.EXAMPLE:DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301DOT = Department of Transportation– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department ofTransportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway useMA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)– 03 means the 3rd week01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)– 01 means the year 2001– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number torepresent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could repre-sent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991Tire Terminology And DefinitionsTerm DefinitionB-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of thebody located behind the front door.Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pres-sure after the vehicle has not been driven for at leastthree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) aftersitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pres-sure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per squareinch) or kPa (kilopascals).Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximumpermissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.The maximum inflation pressure is molded into thesidewall.Recommended Cold Tire InflationPressureVehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure as shown on the tire placard.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE238
Term DefinitionTire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describ-ing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equip-ment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire infla-tion pressures.Tire Loading And Tire PressureTire And Loading Information Placard LocationNOTE:The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edgeof the driver's side door.Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at leastmonthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.NOTE:Refer to the Owner's Manual on the DVD orthe Tire Information Supplement located inyour Owner’s Information kit for more infor-mation regarding tire warnings andinstructions.Example Tire Placard Location (Door)Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE239
WARNING!• Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affectvehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recom-mended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-inflationincreases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. Over-inflationreduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes cancause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire pressures can cause steeringproblems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or under-inflated tirescan affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.Tire And Loading Information PlacardThis placard tells you important informationabout the:1. Number of people that can be carried inthe vehicle.2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,rear, and spare tires.LoadingThe vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of thetire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to theloading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire andLoading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sectionof the Owner’s Manual on the DVD.Tire And Loading Information PlacardMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE240
NOTE:Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for thefront and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicleloading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”section of the Owner’s Manual on the DVD.To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “Thecombined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on theTire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggageand trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there willbe five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.Metric Example For Load LimitFor example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there will be five 68 kg passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.NOTE:• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may notbe accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE241
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed 865 lbs (392 kg).WARNING!Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehiclehandling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended loadcapacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATIONSUMMER/THREE-SEASON TIRES• This vehicle may be equipped with wheels and tires to enhance traction in both wet anddry conditions.• Summer tires are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.• Summer tires have significantly reduced grip in temperatures below 50°F (10°C).• Use Summer tires only in sets of four.NOTE:Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol onthe sidewall of the tire.WARNING!Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose control, resulting insevere injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of lossof vehicle control.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE242
Spare Tires — If EquippedNOTE:For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “TireService Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information.CAUTION!Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through anautomatic car wash with a compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If EquippedYour vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and functionto the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. Thisspare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.Compact Spare Tire — If EquippedThe compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicleis equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire andLoading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewallof the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding thesize designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.T,S=Temporary Spare TireSince this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (orreplaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact sparewheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not installmore than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.WARNING!Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With thesespares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limitedtread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use sparetire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare.Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE243
Full Size Spare — If EquippedThe full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like theoriginally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tiremay have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, thetemporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as youroriginal equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on thevehicle at the first opportunity.Limited Use Spare — If EquippedThe limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by alabel located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations forthis spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of yourvehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling.Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the originalequipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.WARNING!Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tireaffects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on thelimit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on yourTire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rearedge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the firstopportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss ofvehicle control.Wheel And Wheel Trim CareAll wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should becleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and toprevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body ofthe vehicle.Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesiumchloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control duston dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not useharsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating thathelps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.NOTE:Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that canharm the wheel surface.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE244
CAUTION!Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkalineadditives or harsh brushes. These products and automatic car washes may damage thewheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be takenin the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damageto the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent isrecommended. Select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chromewheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They willpermanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.CAUTION!Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner.These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not coveredby the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner orequivalent is recommended.NOTE:If you intend on parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning thewheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving thevehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotorcorrosion.Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome WheelsCAUTION!If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USEwheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage thisfinish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USEONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this isall that is required to maintain this finish.DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITYGRADESThe following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer ineach category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE245
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.TreadwearThe Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of theiruse, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.Traction GradesThe Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.WARNING!The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.Temperature GradesThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, whichall passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory testwheel, than the minimum required by law.WARNING!The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.FUEL DOOR RELEASEThe fuel door release button is located in the driver's door map pocket.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE246
• Push the button once and release toopen the fuel door.Fuel Door Emergency Release• To manually open the fuel door, removethe cover and pull the release cable lo-cated in the trunk.Emergency RefuelingA funnel is provided (located in the trunk inthe spare tire area) to open the flapper doorto allow for emergency refueling with a gascan.Fuel Door Release ButtonFuel Door Emergency ReleaseEmergency Fuel FunnelMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE247
WARNING!• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is openor the tank is being filled.• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state andfederal fire regulations and/or local bylaws, and will cause the MIL to turn on.• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of avehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground whilefilling.CAUTION!To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.Materials Added To FuelDesignated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher levelof detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel systemdeposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasolineis recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline Retailers.Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should beavoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnishremoval may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. Thesecan harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF EQUIPPEDE-85 General InformationThe information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehiclescan be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or UnleadedGasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the Owner’s Manual on the DVD for furtherinformation.CAUTION!Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a yellow gas cap can operate onE-85.REPLACEMENT BULBSAll of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types. Aluminum basebulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE248
Interior BulbsBulb NumberRear Courtesy/Reading Lamps W5WRear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp 562Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578Visor Vanity Lamps A6220Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped 194Door Courtesy 562Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.Exterior BulbsBulb NumberLow/High Beam Headlamp (Standard Halo-gen Bi Function Projector)9005SL+Low/High Beam Headlamp – High IntensityDischarge (Premium HID Bi Function Pro-jector)D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Front Park/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Front Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Rear Tail Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Rear Stop/Turn Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Rear Side Marker LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)Backup Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)License LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE249
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTERP.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-800-423-6343FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTERP.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800-465-2001 (English) Phone:1-800-387-9983 (French)ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING IMPAIREDTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed specialTDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Anyhearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventionalteletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer bydialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that requireassistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTYteletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect witha Bell Relay Service operator.WARNING!Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, orother reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certainproducts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.PUBLICATIONS ORDERING• If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimen-tary printed copy of the Owner's Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or WarrantyBooklet. United States customers may visit the Dodge Contact Us page atwww.dodge.com scroll to the bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us” link, thenselect the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. Youmay also obtain a complimentary copy by calling 1-800-423-6343 (U.S.) or1-800-387-1143 (Canada).• Replacement User Guide kits, DVDs, or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of theOwner's Manual, Warranty Booklet, or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visitingwww.techauthority.com or by calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover orders are accepted. Ifyou prefer mailing your order, please call the above numbers for an order form.NOTE:• A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).CONSUMER ASSISTANCE250
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the Chrysler,Jeep®, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/Service Manuals”, then select yourdesired model year and vehicle from the drop down lists.REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS IN THE UNITED STATESIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, yourauthorized dealer or FCA US LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You canalso obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.In CanadaIf you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the CustomerService Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defectto the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle DefectInvestigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.French Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian govern-ment should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recallsat 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere/.CONSUMER ASSISTANCE251
AUTHENTIC ACCESSORIES BY MOPAR• The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Dodge Accessories by Moparfeaturing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your Dodge Charger.• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premiumprotection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehiclewith accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.• For the full line of Authentic Dodge Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership oronline at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.NOTE:All parts are subject to availability.EXTERIOR:• Rear Spoiler • Custom Wheels • Fog Lights• Trailer Hitch Receiver AndWire Harness• Graphics Packages • Molded Splash GuardsINTERIOR:• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Slush Mats • Bright Pedal Kit• Door Sill Guards • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Katzkin Leather InteriorsELECTRONICS:• Kicker Sound System • Uconnect Phone • Remote Start• Electronic Vehicle TrackingSystem (EVTS)• Mopar ConnectPERFORMANCE• Cold Air Intake • Cat Back Exhaust • Strut Tower Braces• Scat Pack PerformancePackages• Performance Suspension • Anti Sway Bars• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.MOPAR® ACCESSORIES252
FAQ’sGETTING STARTEDHow do I install my LATCH Equipped Child Seat? pg. 44How do I program my Front Seat Memory? pg. 52OPERATING YOUR VEHICLEHow does the Automatic Climate Control operate? pg. 89ELECTRONICSHow do I know which radio I have?• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 107• Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV pg. 117How do I select the AUX music source? pg. 123How do I set the clock on my radio?• Uconnect 5.0 pg. 108• Uconnect 8.4, 8.4 NAV pg. 117How do I use the Navigation feature? pg. 131How do I pair my cell phone via Bluetooth with the Uconnect Hands-Free Voice ActivationSystem? pg. 150How do I configure my Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)? pg. 162How do I improve the Bluetooth performance of my Uconnect System? pg. 155UTILITYHow do I know how much I can tow with my vehicler? pg. 167WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIESWhat do I do if my TPMS warning light is blinking? pg. 176How do I change a flat tire? pg. 183How do I Jump-Start my vehicle? pg. 195MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLEWhere is my Fuse Block located? pg. 231What type of oil do I use in my 3.6L or 5.7L engine? pg. 213What type of oil do I use in my 6.4L or 6.2L Supercharged engine? pg. 215How often should I change my engine’s oil? pg. 216How often should I change my SRT engine’s oil? pg. 224FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS253
What should my tire pressure be set at? pg. 239FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS254
Accessories ...............252Mopar ................252Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)Off ..................73On ..................73Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (CruiseControl) ................72Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . .216Adding Washer Fluid ..........216Additives, Fuel .............248AdjustDown .................51Forward ...............51Rearward ...............51Up ..................51Aftermarket ................4AirBag..................30Advance Front Air Bag .......30Air Bag Operation ..........31Air Bag Warning Light ........28Driver Knee Air Bag .........32Enhanced Accident Response .36, 201Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .201Front Air Bag ............30If A Deployment Occurs .......36Knee Impact Bolsters ........32Maintaining Your Air Bag System .37Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .29Side Air Bags ............32Transporting Pets ..........49Air Bag Light............28, 176Air Bag Maintenance ..........37Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air CleanerFilter) ................216Air Conditioner Maintenance .....216Air Conditioning ........87, 89, 90Air Conditioning Refrigerant ......216Air Conditioning System ........216AlarmVehicle Security Alarm .......19Alarm (Security Alarm) ......19, 180Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . .212, 216Disposal ..............216Anti-Lock Warning Light ........176Appearance Care ............216Arming System (Security Alarm) ....19Assistance Towing ...........175Audio Jack ............110, 123Automatic Headlights ..........68Automatic High Beams .......68, 69Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . .181Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .89,90Air Recirculation ..........91SYNC Temperature Button . . .88, 91Automatic Transmission .........82Adding Fluid . .213, 214, 215, 216Fluid Type . . . .213, 214, 215, 216AutostickOperation ..............84Axle Fluid ......213, 214, 215, 216Axle Lubrication . . .213, 214, 215, 216Battery ..............195, 216Jump Starting ...........195Location ..............195Blind Spot Monitoring ..........80Body Mechanism Lubrication .....216Boost ..................173B-Pillar Location ............239Brake Fluid .....213, 214, 215, 216Brakes .................216Brake System .............216Fluid Check . . .213, 214, 215, 216Master Cylinder ..........216Warning Light ...........178Braking .................159SRT.................159Braking Distance ............159SRT.................159Break-In Recommendations, NewVehicle ................63Bulb Replacement ...........248Bulbs, Light ..............248Calibration, Compass .........157Camera, Rear ..............79Canada ...............4,251Capacities, Fluid ............212Caps, FillerOil (Engine) ............216Car Washes ...............216Change Oil Indicator ..........181Changing A Flat Tire ..........183Charging System Light.........175Chart, Tire Sizing............237INDEX
Child Restraint..............38Child RestraintsBooster Seats ............40Child Restraints ...........38Child Seat Installation ........47How To Stow An Unused ALR SeatBelt ..................45Infants And Child Restraints ....39Lower Anchors And Tethers For Chil-dren .................41Older Children And Child Restraints .40Seating Positions ..........41CleaningWheels ............216, 244Windshield Wiper Blades .....216Climate Control .........87, 89, 90Clock ..................108Cluster Warning/Indicator LightsAnti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light . . .176Brake Warning Light ........178Charging System Light ......175Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Indi-cator Light .............176Engine Temperature Warning Light...................177Front Fog Light Indicator .....180High Beam Indicator .......180Oil Pressure Warning Light . . . .175Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Light ...........176Turn Signal Indicator .......179Vehicle Security Light .......180Clutch .................216Clutch Fluid ..............216Compact Spare Tire ..........243Compass Calibration ..........157Cooling System.............216Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . .216Coolant Capacity .........212Coolant Level ...........216Disposal Of Used Coolant .....216Drain, Flush, And Refill ......216Inspection .............216Points To Remember .......216Pressure Cap ...........216Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .212,213, 214, 215, 216Corrosion Protection ..........216Customer Assistance.......250, 251Customer Programmable Features . .161Deck Lid, Emergency Release .....15Deck Lid, Power Release ........15Defects, Reporting ...........251Defroster, Rear Window .........87Defroster, Windshield ..........87Dimmer Control ...........68, 69Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....68, 69Disabled Vehicle Towing .....175, 199Disarming, Security System .......20DisposalAntifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . .216Disturb .................154Door Locks ................13Drive Modes ...........161, 169Driver Information DisplayControls ...............157DID .................157E-85 Fuel................248Electronic Power Distribution Center(Fuses) ...............231Electronics.................4Your Vehicle's Sound System ....94Electronic Speed Control (CruiseControl)..............69, 70Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . .178Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFFIndicator...............181Electronic Throttle Control WarningLight.................176Emergencies, What To Do In .....175Emergency ...............175Emergency Deck Lid Release ......15Emergency, In Case OfFreeing Vehicle When Stuck . . .200Jacking ...............183Jump Starting ........195, 197Overheating ............182Towing ............175, 199Emergency Key .............13Emergency Trunk Release ........15Engine .................173Air Cleaner .............216Break-In Recommendations ....63Checking Oil Level .........216INDEX
Compartment . .204, 206, 208, 210Coolant (Antifreeze) . .213, 214, 215Cooling ...............216Jump Starting ........195, 197Oil .....212, 213, 214, 215, 216Oil Change Interval ........181Oil Filler Cap ...........216Oil Selection .........212, 216Overheating ............182Starting ...............18Stopping ..............18Temperature Warning Light . . . .177Engine Break-In3.6L .................635.7L .................646.2L .................666.4L .................65Enhanced Accident Response Feature.36,201Ethanol .................248Exhaust System ............216FAQ...................253FiltersAir Cleaner .............216Engine Oil . . . .213, 214, 215, 216Engine Oil Disposal ........216FlashersTurn Signal ............179Flexible Fuel VehiclesFuel Requirements ........248Fluid, Brake .....213, 214, 215, 216Fluid Capacities ............212Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts.213, 215Fog Lights .............68, 180Folding Rear Seat ............56Forward Collision Warning........76Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ........200Frequently Asked Questions ......253FuelAdditives ..............248Ethanol ..............248Filler Door Emergency Release . .247Filler Door (Gas Cap) .......246Materials Added ..........248Octane Rating .....213, 214, 215Specifications .....213, 214, 215Tank Capacity ...........212Fuel, Flexible ..............248Fuses ..................231Garage Door Opener (HomeLink).162, 164Gauge..................173SRT.................173General Maintenance .........216G-Force ..............160, 173SRT..............160, 173Glass Cleaning .............216Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . .148Headlamp ..............67, 68HeadlightsAutomatic ..............68Cleaning ..............216Dimmer Switch .........68, 69High Beam ...........67, 68Head Restraints ...........49, 50Head Rests .............49, 50Heated Mirrors ...........88, 91Heated Seats ..............57High Beam Indicator..........180High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)Switch ..............67, 68Home ..................172HomeLinkOperation ..............164HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).162, 164Hood Release .............202Horsepower...............173Instrument Cluster ............8Instrument Cluster Warning Lights . .175Instrument Panel Cover ........216Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . .216Interior And Instrument Lights ......7Interior Appearance Care .......216Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . .67Introduction ................3Aftermarket Electronics ........4Canada ................4iPod/USB/MP3 ControlBluetooth Streaming Audio . . . .148Jack Location..............183Jack Operation .............183INDEX
Jump Starting ..........195, 197KeyFob...............11, 12392 .................12Base .................11Black Key ..............12Function ...............11Hellcat ................12Lock The Doors ...........13RedKey ...............12SRT..................12Unlock The Doors ..........13Keyless Enter-N-Go ...........16Accessory Postition .........19Automatic Trans ...........18Engine Starting ...........18Engine Stopping ...........18Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ......13Lock/Unlock ..........16, 17Starting/Stopping ..........18Lane Change Assist ...........67LaneSense ................78Lap History ...............160SRT.................160Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........22Lap Timer................160SRT.................160Light Bulbs ...............248LightsAirBag ...............28Fog .................180High Beam Indicator .......180Interior ................69Low Fuel ..............175Security Alarm ...........180Service ...............248Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .176Loading VehicleTires ................239LocksDoor .................13Lubrication, Body ...........216Maintaining Your Vehicle .......202Maintenance ..............202Maintenance Free Battery .......216Maintenance, General ......202, 216Maintenance Procedures .......216Maintenance Record.......222, 229Maintenance Schedule . .216, 224, 226Malfunction Indicator Light (CheckEngine) ...............179Master Cylinder (Brakes)........216Media Center Radio ..........114Memory Feature (Memory Seat).....52Memory Seat...............52Memory Seats And Radio ........52MirrorsHeated .............88, 91Mopar..................252MOPAR Accessories ..........252Navigation ............131, 135New Vehicle Break-In Period ......63Occupant Restraints...........20Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .213, 214,215Oil Change Indicator ..........181Oil Change Indicator, Reset ......181Oil, Engine ......213, 214, 215, 216Capacity ..............212Change Interval .......181, 216Checking ..............216Disposal ..............216Filter .......213, 214, 215, 216Filter Disposal ...........216Materials Added To ........216Recommendation ......212, 216Viscosity ...........212, 216Oil Filter, Selection...........216Oil Pressure Light ...........175OutletPower ...............164Overheating, Engine ..........182Paint Care ...............216Panic Alarm ...............13ParkSense System, Rear ........80Performance ...........157, 172Personalized Menu Bar ........119Pets ...................49Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . .148Phone (Pairing).............150Phone (Uconnect) ........115, 148INDEX
Pinch Protection .............92Placard, Tire And Loading Information.239, 240PowerDeck Lid Release ..........15Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . .233Glass Sunroof ............91Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .164Seats ................51Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .61Power SeatsDown .................51Forward ...............51Power Lumbar ............52Rearward ...............51Recline ................51Up ..................51Power Steering Fluid.213, 214, 215, 216Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ....26Preparation For Jacking ........185PretensionersSeat Belts ..............26Programmable Electronic Features . .161,170Radio ............96, 107, 113Balance and Fade .........108Equalizer ..............108Operation ..............109Presets ...............119Setting the Clock ..........108Radio Screens .............117Radio (Sound Systems) . . .96, 107, 113Rain Sensitive Wiper System ......67Rear Camera ...............79Rear Cross Path .............80Rear ParkSense System .........80Rear Seat, Folding............56Recreational Towing ..........168Refrigerant ...............216Reminder, Seat Belt ...........21Remote ControlTrunk Release ............13Remote Keyless EntryLock The Doors ...........13Unlock The Doors ..........13Remote StartingEnter Remote Start Mode ......14Exit Remote Start Mode ......14How To Use Remote Start ......14KeyFob ...............14Remote Starting System ......14Remote Starting System ........14Remote Trunk Release..........15Replacement Bulbs ..........248Reporting Safety Defects .......251Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . .181Restraint, Head ...........49, 50Restraints, Child .............38Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .....200Safety Information, Tire ........236Schedule, Maintenance .....216, 224Seat BeltAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt An-chorage ...............24Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .26Energy Management Feature ....26Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....24Lap/Shoulder Belts .........22Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ....24Pregnant Women ..........26Seat Belt Extender .........25Seat Belt Pretensioner .......26Seat Belt Reminder .........21Seat Belt Maintenance ........216Seat Belt Reminder ...........21Seat Belts ................21Adjustable Shoulder Belt ......24Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage....................24Child Restraint ...........38Extender ...............25Front Seat .........21, 22, 24Operating Instructions .......24Pregnant Women ..........26Pretensioners ............26Rear Seat ..............22Untwisting Procedure ........24Seats.................51, 58Adjustment .............51Easy Entry ..............55Head Restraints ........49, 50Heated .............57, 58Height Adjustment .........51Memory ...............52INDEX
Power ................51Rear Folding ............56Seatback Release ..........56Tilting ................51Vented ................59Ventilated ..............59Security Alarm .............180Security Alarm ............19Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .213,214, 215Shoulder Belts ..............22Signals, Turn............67, 179Sirius Satellite Radio ......110, 121Traffic & Weather ..........135SIRIUS Travel Link...........135SiriusXM Guardian............98Account ...............98In Vehicle Features .........101Maintaining Your Account .....101Mobile App ..........100, 144Registration .............99Remote Features ..........104Renewing Subscriptions ......101Send&Go .............100Vehicle Finder ...........100Vehicle Health Alert ........144Sound Systems (Radio) . .96, 107, 123,131Spare Tire .........183, 243, 244Spark Plugs ........213, 214, 215SpecificationsFuel (Gasoline) . . . .213, 214, 215Oil ...........213, 214, 215Speed ...........158, 159, 160Speed ControlAccel/Decel ...........71, 72Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .......73Cancel ................70Distance Setting (ACC Only) ....75Mode Setting (ACC Only) ......75Resume ...............71Set ..................70Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .69, 70SRTEngine ...............173Gauge ...............173G-Force ............160, 173Home ................172Lap History .............160Timers ......158, 159, 160, 172Top Speed .............160SRT Performance Features ......170StartingRemote ...............14SteeringColumn Lock ............61Tilt Column .............61Wheel, Heated ...........60Wheel, Tilt ..............61Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . .156Stuck, Freeing .............200SunroofClosing ................92Opening ...............91Venting ................91Sun Roof .................91Supplemental Restraint System - AirBag..................30Telescoping Steering Column ......61Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).89,90Text Messaging..........116, 154Tilt Steering Column...........61Timers ........158, 159, 160, 172SRT .......158, 159, 160, 172Tire And Loading Information Placard.239,240Tire Markings ..............236Tires .........174, 242, 243, 245Air Pressure ............239Changing ..........183, 189Compact Spare ..........243Flat Changing ...........189General Information .174, 242, 243Jacking ...........183, 185Load Capacity ........239, 240Quality Grading ..........245Replacement ...........189Safety ...............236Sizes ................237Spare Tire .......183, 243, 244Wheel Mounting ..........189Tire Safety Information.........236Tire Service Kit.189, 190, 191, 192, 194, 195INDEX
Top Speed ............160, 173SRT.................160Torque .................173Towing .................167Disabled Vehicle ..........199Recreational ............168Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome .168Trailer TowingTrailer And Tongue Weight . . . .167Trailer Weight..............167Transfer CaseFluid ..........213, 214, 215TransmissionAutomatic ..............82Fluid .......213, 214, 215, 216Maintenance ............216Transporting Pets ............49Trunk Lid (Deck Lid)...........15Trunk Release, Emergency .......15Trunk Release Remote Control .....15Turn Signals ............67, 179Uconnect 5.0 .............107Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV ........117Helpful Tips For Bluetooth .....155Mute ................153Phonebook .............153Transfer Ongoing Call Between Hand-set And Vehicle ...........153Voice Recognition Tips .......153Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Voice RecognitionRegister ...............143SiriusXM Guardian .........142Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)Making A Phone Call . . . .148, 153Receiving A Call ..........148Uconnect Phone ......148, 153, 154Uconnect Voice Command.111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 136, 153Uniform Tire Quality Grades ......245Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....24USB Port .............110, 123Vehicle Loading ............240Vehicle User GuideICON Symbol Glossary .......10In Vehicle Help ...........10IVH..................10Navigation ..............10Operating Instructions ........10Searching User Guide ........10Voice Command. . .111, 112, 113, 114,115, 116, 153Voice Recognition System (VR).111, 112,113, 114, 115, 116, 136, 153, 154WasherAdding Fluid ............216Washers, Windshield ..........67Washing Vehicle ............216Wheel And Wheel Trim .....216, 244Wheel And Wheel Trim Care. . .216, 244Wind Buffeting..............92Windshield Washers ...........67Windshield Wiper Blades .......216Windshield Wipers ............67Wiper Blade Replacement .......216INDEX

Navigation menu